JP2019177229A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of inhibiting deterioration in taste caused by such an event that a plurality of game balls continuously enter special ball entry means.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 10 includes specific ball entry means having a specific area in which game balls moving a game area can enter. The specific area includes: first type ball entry means and second type ball entry means in which game balls can enter; and first type ball entry detection means and second type ball entry detection means that detect game balls entering the first type ball entry means and second type ball entry means. When a game ball is detected by the first type ball entry means, the pachinko machine executes a first provision, and, when a game ball is detected by the second type ball entry means, executes a second provision more advantageous to a player than the first provision. Further, a first type determination time from when a game ball enters the specific area to when the entry is detected by the first type ball entry detection means is set longer than a second type determination time from when a game ball enters the specific area to when the entry is detected by the second type ball entry detection means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, for example, a pachinko machine is known as a kind of gaming machine. The pachinko machine is configured such that a game is played using a game ball, the game ball is provided with a movable game area, and the game ball launched by the launching unit is guided to the game area.

  Further, the pachinko machine is provided with specific ball entry means having a specific area where a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and the game ball enters the start ball entry means provided in the game area. When the specific entry means is in an open state allowing entry of game balls into the specific area, and the game balls entering the specific area enter special entry means within the area, In some cases, a special gaming state advantageous to the player occurs (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312

  By the way, during the special game state or when the special game state right is obtained, even if the game ball enters the special ball entry means, a further special game state is given. Not. In other words, even if a relatively rare phenomenon such as a plurality of consecutive game balls entering the special ball entry means occurs, the right to be granted a special game state is only once, and the player has lost. I am concerned that I may have the impression of being a waste. As a result, there is a concern that a situation may arise in which the player is not happy to let go even though a favorable situation has been reached for the player, such as a case where a special game state is given.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and its purpose is to suppress a decrease in interest caused by a plurality of game balls continuously entering special ball entry means. It is to provide a game machine that can be used.

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A game area where game balls launched by the launching means are guided; and
Specific entry means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area,
A first entry means capable of entering a game ball entered into the specific entry means, and a second entry means;
First entry detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the first entry means;
A second incoming detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second incoming means;
When a game ball is detected by the first incoming ball detecting means, a first grant is performed,
When a game ball is detected by the second ball detection means, a second grant that is more advantageous for the player than the first grant is performed,
A first determination time until a game ball that has entered the specific entry means is detected by the first entry detection means,
The game ball that has entered the specific entry means is configured to be longer than a second determination time until the second entry detection means detects the game ball,
A pre-detection means for detecting a game ball that enters the specific entry means and enters the first entry means before entering the first entry means;
Based on the detection of the previous detection means, it is configured to be able to derive a teaching effect for teaching that the second grant is performed when a game ball is detected by the second incoming detection means,
When the previous detection means is detected during the teaching effect, the teaching effect is continuously performed,
When the second entrance detection means is detected during the teaching effect, an effect corresponding to the second provision is performed following the teaching effect.

  According to the first aspect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest caused by a plurality of game balls continuously entering the special ball entry means.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows structures, such as an inner frame and a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame, the back pack unit, etc. It is a block diagram which shows the main electrical structures of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a change time determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flowchart which shows entrance ball count processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a non-special prize process. It is a flowchart which shows an early detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a type entry process. It is a flowchart which shows an accessory jackpot setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows discrimination | determination information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows an end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a blade member opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd display control process. It is a flowchart which shows an opportunity corresponding unit control process. It is a flowchart which shows a residual sphere monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a prior | preceding effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows holding information storage processing. It is a front schematic diagram of a center winning unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a rotary body unit. It is a front schematic diagram which shows a route distribution apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of a route distribution apparatus. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the route distribution apparatus in another embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram of the route distribution apparatus in another embodiment. It is the plane schematic diagram of the route distribution apparatus in another embodiment, and a front schematic diagram. It is a front schematic diagram of the route distribution apparatus in another embodiment. It is the plane schematic diagram of the route distribution apparatus in another embodiment, and a front schematic diagram.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that constitutes an outline of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported at one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. . As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 is composed of an upper side frame constituting unit 11a, a lower side frame constituting unit 11b, a left side frame constituting unit 11c, and a right side frame constituting unit 11d, and is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole. Yes. An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower hinges 81 and 82 support the upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 so that the inner frame 12 can be rotated. As a result, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and the like are accommodated in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

  The right side frame constituting portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided on the lower receiving portion 85 so as to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11. Furthermore, a resin curtain decoration 87 is attached to the lower frame constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set up and down on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis serving as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 whose outer shape is rectangular, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed at the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window 101 is formed at the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a front plate of the front frame set 14 is provided with a lower plate 15 as a ball receiving tray at the center of the lower portion, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are placed in the lower plate 15. It can be stored inside. In addition, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided. In addition, an effect button 125 with a built-in LED is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15, and by pressing the effect button 125, a corresponding effect is performed on a decorative symbol display device 42 described later. Or the production content is changed.

  On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball launching handle (hereinafter simply referred to as a handle) 18 protruding toward the front side is provided. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18. When the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is launched by a launching device 60 serving as launching means described later with a strength corresponding to the amount of pivoting operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibiting button 18 a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand that holds the handle 18. In the state where the firing prohibition button 18a is pressed, even if the handle 18 is held, the launching device 60 is prohibited from launching the game ball. Therefore, the rotation of the handle 18 can be performed while prohibiting the launch of the game ball, or the launch of the game ball can be temporarily stopped while the handle 18 is held.

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward a launching device 60 described later while aligning them in a row. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 via the lower plate communication passage 71 and the discharge port 16 described later.

  The upper plate 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. Thereby, in the game hall or the like, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with a bill or a card inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, depending on the operation Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary for a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lending to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine.

  Further, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicating with the lower plate 15 is opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game ball is guided (dropped) to the lower plate 15. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing and controlling the light emission mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. For example, at the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 that are turned on when a predetermined error occurs are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. In addition, a large number of small through holes are formed in the annular illumination portion 102 above the error display lamps 104 corresponding to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. .

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not attached to a pair of conventional front and rear rectangular glass plates separately in front and rear pairs, but is formed into a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

  Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) on the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached in a state in which the peripheral edge thereof is in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface portion of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

  Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), a launch rail for guiding the launch device 60 and the game ball immediately after being launched from the launch device 60. 61 is attached. In the present embodiment, a solenoid-type firing device is employed as the firing device 60. In addition, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 one by one to the launching position of the launching device 60 by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 is provided.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b as starting starting means, a through gate 34, a central winning unit 37 as a specific winning means, and a special winning unit. The display device 43 or the like is disposed in a through hole formed by router processing, and is attached from the front side of the game board 30 with a wood screw or the like. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning ports such as the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the first and second starting winning devices 33a, 33b, etc., it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper plate 19 Alternatively, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the lower plate 15. For example, when there is a ball entering the start winning devices 33a and 33b, three when there is a ball entering the general winning port 31, and when there is a ball entering the variable winning device 32 Ten game balls are paid out in the game. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and the game balls that have not won the various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are discharged out of the game area through the out port 36. . In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as windmills (servants).

  Here, the central winning unit 37 will be described with reference to FIG. 4, FIG. 39, FIG. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 39, the central winning unit 37 is provided in the center of the game area (game board 30) and forms a specific area 401 in which a game ball moving (flowing down) in the game area can enter. The housing 402 is provided. In the upper part of the housing 402, a pair of left and right entrance openings 403 serving as entrances for game balls moving in the game area to enter the specific area 401 are formed on both the left and right sides. The central winning unit 37 includes a pair of left and right blade members 404 that move between a closed position that closes each ball-opening opening 403 and an open position that opens, and a blade solenoid that opens and closes the blade member 404. 405 (refer to the block diagram of FIG. 7). When the blade member 404 is displaced to the closed position and the ball entrance opening 403 is closed, the central winning unit 37 is closed, and it is impossible to enter the specific area 401. On the other hand, when the blade member 404 is displaced to the open position and the ball entrance opening 403 is opened, the central winning unit 37 is opened, and the ball entering the specific area 401 is allowed.

  In addition, although mentioned later in detail, the blade member 404 has won a ball to the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, and was won in the winning lottery based on the winning (small hit) ) In an open state for a predetermined time. In this embodiment, the pair of left and right blade members 404 are configured to operate in synchronization with each other. When one of the blade members 404 is in the open position, the other is also in the open position, and one is in the closed position. The other is also in the closed position.

  The specific area 401 of the present embodiment includes a route distribution area 406 where game balls that have entered through the entrance opening 403 are first guided, a winning lottery area 407 located below the route allocation area 407, and a type lottery located further below. It is divided into an area 408.

  In addition, the winning / notch lottery area 407 randomly distributes (distributes) game balls that have entered the winning / rendering area 407 to either the type lottery area 408 or the game area behind the game board 30. A rotating body unit 410 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the rotating body unit 410 includes a unit base 411 fixed to the game board 30 and a substantially annular unit cover 412 attached to the unit base 411 so as to cover the upper surface side of the unit base 411. And a substantially circular accommodating recess 413 corresponding to the substantially central portion of the unit cover 412 is formed. Furthermore, the rotator unit 410 includes a substantially disk-shaped rotator 414 that is rotatably provided inside the housing recess 413, and a rotator motor 415 that rotates the rotator 414 in a certain direction. In the present embodiment, the rotating body 414 is configured to constantly rotate in a counterclockwise direction with a constant period in plan view. The rotating body motor 415 is a stepping motor, and is driven and controlled by a pulse signal output from the main control device 261. As will be described in detail later, the rotating body 414 rotates at a constant cycle, but does not rotate at a constant speed.

  The rotating body 414 has pocket portions 416 that can receive one game ball at each of three locations along the outer peripheral edge thereof. The three pocket portions 416 are classified into two special pocket portions 416a and another (one) non-special pocket portion 416b. The non-special pocket portion 416b opens to the outer peripheral side and upper side of the rotating body 414 and has a bottom wall portion 417. The upper surface of the bottom wall portion 417 is inclined downward toward the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414. Yes. On the other hand, the special pocket part 416a is opened on the outer peripheral side, upward and downward of the rotating body 414, and there is no bottom wall part 417 like the non-special pocket part 416b. In addition, the peripheral portion of the special pocket portion 416a is made of a resin material that is colored differently from the other portions, which makes it easy to distinguish the special pocket portion 416a from the non-special pocket portion 416b. It has become.

  The unit base 411 is formed with a motor installation portion 423 where the rotary body motor 415 is installed and a rotary body installation portion 424 where the rotation body 414 is installed on the upper surface side. Further, a link mechanism (not shown) including three gears for transmitting the driving force of the rotating body motor 415 to the rotating body 414 is provided on the lower surface side of the unit base 411.

  The unit cover 412 is installed so as to surround the rotating body setting portion 424 of the unit base 411. From the upper edge of the cylindrical wall portion 431 and the substantially cylindrical cylindrical wall portion 431 that forms the housing recess 413 together with the rotating body setting portion 424. The upper wall part 432 extended to an outer peripheral side and the surrounding wall 434 extended upwards from the upper edge part (edge part of the opening part of upper wall part 432 inner periphery) of the cylinder wall part 431 are provided.

  In addition, the enclosure wall 434 is provided with a gate portion 435 that allows the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side of the enclosure wall 434 to communicate with each other by opening a range of about 90 degrees on the front edge side of the housing recess 413. . Furthermore, on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 432, a substantially annular game ball rolling path 433 is formed in which a game ball can roll. The game ball rolling path 433 is inclined forward and toward the inner peripheral side of the game ball rolling path 433 with respect to a portion located rearward of the front edge of the housing recess 413, and the front edge of the housing recess 413. The part located in front of the part is inclined downward and toward the inner side of the game ball rolling path 433 (the central part side in the left-right direction). For this reason, when the game ball falls on the game ball rolling path 433, the game ball rolling path 433 is restricted while falling off from the rear and left and right sides of the housing recess 413 to the housing recess 413 (rotating body 414) is restricted. Is configured to enter the pocket portion 416 of the rotator 414 via the gate portion 435 in front of the rotator 414.

  Note that the unit base 411 is also tilted forward corresponding to the tilt of the unit cover 412, and accordingly, the rotary body 414 is also tilted forward, that is, the rotational axis of the rotary body 414 is directed upward. It is installed in a posture that tilts somewhat forward (a posture that makes it easier for a player in front to see).

  Further, the unit base 411 includes a safe passage 427 that communicates with the type lottery area 408 and an out passage 428 that communicates with the outside of the specific area 401 (in this embodiment, the back side of the game board 30 outside the game area). Is formed. The entrance of the safe passage 427 and the out passage 428 is formed at a position (the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical wall portion 431) through which the rotating body 414 can pass over the rotating body installation portion 424.

  The game balls that have entered the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 via the gate portion 435 are aligned with the positions of the special pocket portion 416a and the entrance of the safe passage 427 as the rotating body 414 rotates. At that time, it falls downward from the special pocket portion 416 a and enters the safe passage 427.

  Further, when a game ball enters the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414 through the gate portion 435, the position of the non-special pocket portion 416b and the entrance of the safe passage 427 as the rotating body 414 rotates. Even if the two match, the bottom wall portion 417 provided in the non-special pocket portion 416b does not cause the game ball accommodated in the non-special pocket portion 416b to fall (enter) the safe passage 427 (a gap that can be dropped is formed). Is not).

  On the other hand, the out passage 428 is formed wider than the safe passage 427 (up to the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414), and the lower portion of the cylindrical wall portion 431 is omitted above the out passage 428. . For this reason, when the rotating body 414 further rotates and the positions of the non-special pocket portion 416b in which the game ball is accommodated and the out passage 428 match, the game ball accommodated in the non-special pocket portion 416b becomes the out passage. It will enter 428.

  The safe passage 427 is provided with a special entry detection switch 461 as special entry detection means for detecting a passing game ball. Then, a game ball enters the safe passage 427, and the game ball is detected by the special ball detection switch 461, so that the variable winning device 32 is opened for 30 seconds, or the variable winning device 32 is The winning of eight game balls is regarded as one round, and the right to generate a jackpot state (special game state) in which this is repeated a predetermined number of times is given. As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, when the special ball detection switch 461 detects, the big hit state is not immediately started, but the type of the big hit state is determined in the type lottery area 408. If determined, the jackpot state is configured to start.

  In addition, when a game ball enters, the non-special ball detection switch 462 as non-special ball detection means for detecting the game ball passing through the out passage 428 where the game ball is discharged out of the game area. Is provided. In addition, in this embodiment, when the special ball detection switch 461 and the non-special ball detection switch 462 are detected, ten game balls are added to the upper plate 19 (or the lower plate 15). Paid out.

  It should be noted that the number of game balls to be paid out when the special ball detection switch 461 and the non-special ball detection switch 462 are detected is not particularly limited, and may be one or zero, for example. But you can. In this embodiment, the safe passage 427 in which the special entry detection switch 461 is arranged corresponds to the special entry means (second entry means), and the out passage 428 in which the non-special entry detection switch 462 is arranged. Corresponds to non-special entry means (first entry means).

  In addition, a protruding portion 440 extending from the upper edge of the surrounding wall 434 to the inner peripheral side of the surrounding wall 434 is provided in a portion of the surrounding wall 434 corresponding to the upper part of the entrance of the safe passage 427 and the out passage 428. It has been. The overhanging portion 440 is configured to cover an area about half of the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414 of each pocket portion 416 (special pocket portion 416a, non-special pocket portion 416b) positioned below the overhanging portion 440 from above. . For this reason, another game ball is further placed on the upper side of the game ball that has entered the predetermined pocket portion 416, and two game balls that are vertically overlapped with each other continuously to the safe passage 427 or the out passage 428. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a player enters a ball or a game ball jumps over the surrounding wall 434 for some reason and directly enters the pocket portion 416 at a position matching the safe passage 427 and the out passage 428.

  However, in the present embodiment, two of the three pocket portions 416 are the special pocket portions 416a, and therefore, the two special pocket portions 416a of the rotating body 414 that rotates rotate continuously with the gate portion 435 twice. When the game balls enter the two special pocket portions 416a at the timing, the game balls enter the safe passage 427 continuously (continuously).

  In the present embodiment, the entrance of the safe passage 427 is located in the lower right position when the rotating body installation portion 424 is viewed in plan, and the entire formation range of the entrance of the safe passage 427 is within the formation range of the gate portion 435. The entrance of the out passage 428 is provided at the upper right position when the rotating body installation portion 424 is viewed in plan.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 39 and the like, the central winning unit 37 includes a normal path 701 for guiding the game balls that have entered the specific area 401 (route distribution area 406) to the most upstream part of the game ball rolling path 433, And a special passage 702 for guiding the game ball entering the specific area 401 to the midstream portion of the game ball rolling path 433. The special passage 702 of this embodiment is provided in a pair of left and right. Further, the route distribution area 406 is formed below the route distribution device 703 and a route distribution device 703 as route distribution means provided at a position where the game balls entered from the pair of left and right entrance openings 403 fall. And a normal guide portion 704 that guides the game ball to the normal passage 701 and a special guide portion 705 that is formed on both the left and right sides of the route distribution device 703 and guides the game ball to the special passage 702. . It should be noted that a switch for detecting a game ball is provided for the special passage 702, and when the switch is detected, an effect (sound effect, liquid crystal display) for notifying that the game ball is passing through the special passage 702 is provided. Etc.).

  As shown in FIGS. 41A and 42, the route distribution device 703 has a shaft hole 712 into which a shaft pin 711 extending in the front-rear direction can be inserted, and is pivotally supported with respect to the shaft pin 711. In addition, a substantially cylindrical shaft portion 713, a first wing portion 714 projecting leftward from the shaft portion 713, and a second wing portion 715 projecting rightward from the shaft portion 713 are provided. The route distribution device 703 of this embodiment is made of a translucent resin.

  Further, the route distribution device 703 has a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the shaft portion 713 as the center, and the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 are stably in a reference posture in which the left and right sides protrude from the shaft portion 713. It is configured to be stationary (equilibrium). Further, the guide surfaces 714a and 715a constituting the upper surfaces of the first wing part 714 and the second wing part 715 of the route distribution device 703 in the reference posture are inclined downward toward both sides and communicate with the special guide part 705. It is configured as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the shaft pin 711 is supported at the rear end portion by the rear wall portion of the housing 402 that defines the rear portion of the route distribution area 406, and has a transparent front portion that defines the front portion of the route distribution means 406. The front end portion is supported by the panel 717 (the bearing hole 717a formed in the panel 717). Although not shown, the rear wall portion of the housing 402 has a first position at the rear position of the first wing portion 714 and the rear position of the second wing portion 715 of the route distribution means 406 in the reference posture. The entrance lamp and the second entrance lamp are provided so as not to contact the route distribution means 406. In the present embodiment, the state in which the route distribution device 703 is in the reference posture corresponds to the second guidance state, and the route distribution device 703 is tilted away from the reference posture (the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 are vertically moved). (The posture extending to) corresponds to the first guidance state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 39, the center winning unit 37 has a pair of left and right introduction passages 718 for guiding the game balls that have entered from the pair of left and right entrance openings 403 to the back side of the route distribution area 406, respectively. Is provided. More specifically, as the introduction passage 718, the game ball that has entered the specific area 401 through the left first entrance opening 403 a of the entrance opening 403 is moved to a position above the first wing 714. A game that enters the specific area 401 through the first introduction passage 718a to be guided (dropped to the guide surface 714a of the first wing portion 714) and the second entrance opening 403b on the right side of the entrance opening 403. And a second introduction passage 718b that guides the sphere to a position above the second wing portion 715 (drops to the guide surface 715a of the second wing portion 715). The distance of the first introduction passage 718a and the distance of the second introduction passage 718b are the same, and the game that entered the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b (inlet thereof) almost simultaneously. The spheres are discharged almost simultaneously from the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b (outlet thereof).

  In addition, in the middle of each introduction passage 718 (the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b), a ball entry count switch 437 (hereinafter referred to as a first introduction passage 718a) as an entry detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball. Is installed as a “first incoming count switch 437a”, and installed in the second introduction passage 718b is also called a “second incoming count switch 437b”. In the present embodiment, a game ball that has entered the first entrance opening 403a always passes through the first introduction passage 718a, and a game ball that enters the second entrance opening 403b necessarily passes through the second introduction passage 718b. The game ball that has entered the specific area 401 is surely detected by either the left or right entry count switch 437.

  The passage width of each of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b exceeds the diameter of the game ball and is less than twice the diameter of the game ball (for example, about 1.4 times the diameter of the game ball). ing. Further, the outlets of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b are formed at symmetrical positions around the shaft portion 713 of the route distribution device 703. Further, the first entrance count switch 437a and the second entrance count switch 437b of the present embodiment are located near the exits of the corresponding first introduction passage 718a and second introduction passage 718b (in this example, the game ball is at the exit). At the same distance from each outlet (for example, 1 cm behind each outlet).

  When the central winning unit 37 is in the open state, the game ball that has entered the specific area 401 via the first ball opening 403a or the second ball opening 403b is the first introduction passage 718a or It passes through the second introduction passage 718b and falls on the guide surfaces 714a and 715a of the first wing part 714 or the second wing part 715. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 41 (b) and 41 (c), when the game ball falls only on either the first wing 714 or the second wing 715, the route distribution device 703 It is rotated (tilted) by the force received from the game ball. Further, by rotating the route distribution device 703, the guide surfaces 714a and 715a of the first wing part 714 or the second wing part 715 communicate with the normal guide part 704 (the first wing part 714 and the second wing part). A communication path to the normal guide unit 704 that has been blocked at 715 is opened), and the game ball is guided (entered) to the normal guide unit 704.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), when game balls fall on the first wing part 714 and the second wing part 715 almost at the same time (for example, one by one). The rotation of the route distribution device 703 is suppressed. Then, by avoiding the rotation of the route distribution device 703, both the game balls that have fallen on the first wing part 714 and the second wing part 715 are guided to the special guide part 705, respectively.

  In addition, the normal guide part 704, the normal path | route 701, and the game ball rolling path 433 comprise a 1st guide route (normal route), the special guide part 705, the special path | route 702, and the game ball rolling path 433 ( The downstream part of the middle stream part) constitutes the second guide route (special route). In addition, a route distribution device 703 is provided at a branch point between the normal route (normal passage 701) and the special route (special passage 702).

  As shown in FIG. 39, the rotating body unit 410 is provided with a slide unit 721 that is installed corresponding to the most upstream part of the game ball rolling path 433 and is slidable in the left-right direction. . The slide unit 721 includes a passage-side guide plate 723 that is inclined downward toward the left, and an out-side guide plate 724 that is connected to the right side portion of the passage-side guide plate 723 and is inclined downward toward the right. A member 722 and a slide motor 725 that reciprocates the slide member 722 left and right are provided. The slide motor 725 is a stepping motor, and is driven and controlled by a pulse signal output from the main control device 261.

  Further, the exit of the normal passage 701 is formed at a position above the slide unit 721 (slide member 722), and the game ball that has passed through the normal passage 701 is the passage side guide plate 723 of the slide member 722 or the out side. It will fall to the guide plate 724. In addition, the width of the out-side guide plate 724 is wider than the width of the passage-side guide plate 723 in the left-right direction. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the boundary portion (the top portion of the slide member 722) between the passage side guide plate 723 and the out side guide plate 724 is located on the right side of the center position in the lateral width direction of the exit of the normal passage 701. The slide speed is set to be faster than the slide speed when it is located on the left side. With this configuration, in the reciprocating motion of the slide member 722, the time when the top of the slide member 722 is located on the left side of the center position in the lateral width direction of the outlet of the normal passage 701 is longer than the time when it is located on the right side. It is comprised so that it may become. Thereby, for example, game balls that have passed through the normal passage 701 are distributed to the right side by a ratio of 1 to 5 by the slide unit 721.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the upper wall 432 (game ball rolling path 433) of the unit cover 412 of the rotating body unit 410 is positioned at the right side of the enclosure wall 434 (rotating body 414). A drop-off opening 727 communicating with the out passage 428 is formed. In other words, the game ball guided to the right side of the game ball rolling road 433 by the slide unit 721 falls to the out passage 428 through the drop opening 727 and is discharged to the outside of the game area. Yes. Note that the dropout opening 727 communicates with a portion of the out passage 428 upstream of the position where the non-special ball detection switch 462 is installed, and the game dropped into the out passage 428 via the dropout opening 727. The ball is also detected by the non-special entry detection switch 462.

  On the other hand, the game ball guided to the left side of the game ball rolling road 433 by the slide unit 721 is displaced counterclockwise on the game ball rolling path 433 and left and right several times in front of the gate portion 435. And then, when the relative position of the rotating body 414 with the special pocket part 416a or the non-special pocket part 416b is matched via the gate part 435, it enters the pocket parts 416a and 416b. It will be.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the outlets of the pair of left and right special passages 702 are respectively formed at the left and right side positions of the rotating body unit 410 (the upper wall portion 432 of the unit cover 412). The game ball that has passed enters the midstream portion of the game ball rolling path 433. Even when the game ball passes through the right special passage 702, the game ball passes through the special passage 702 because it is guided to a part of the game ball rolling path 433 that is downstream of the dropout opening 727. With respect to the game ball, it will surely enter the special pocket part 416a or the non-special pocket part 416b of the rotating body 414 through the gate part 435. That is, if the game ball can enter the special guide portion 705 and pass through the special passage 702, the distribution by the slide unit 721 can be avoided (skip), and as a result, the game ball is placed in the special pocket portion 416a. It is possible to increase the possibility of entering a ball and, in turn, the expectation of occurrence of a big hit state.

  In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the rotating body 414 and the slide member 722 are configured to continue to operate at a constant period or a constant rhythm. For example, when a game ball is detected by the entrance count switch 437, the operation is started, and when all the game balls are discharged from the specific area 401 (a specified time has passed since all the game balls were discharged). In some cases, the operation may stop.

  In this embodiment, the game ball detected by the special ball detection switch 461 by entering the special pocket portion 416 a of the rotating body 414 and passing through the safe passage 427 is guided to the type lottery area 408. It is configured as follows. In the type lottery area 408, a 15R big hit state (15 rounds big hit) is given when a game ball enters, and a “7 round” when a game ball enters. 7R entrance 732 to which a big hit state (7 rounds big hit) is given, and 3R entrance 733 to which a “3 rounds” big hit state (3 rounds big hit) is given when a game ball enters Is provided. Further, a 15R entrance detection switch 734 that detects a game ball that enters the 15R entrance 731, a 7R entrance detection switch 735 that detects a game ball that enters the 7R entrance 732, and a 3R entrance A 3R entry detection switch 736 for detecting a game ball entered in 733 is provided.

  In the type lottery area 408, a type as a type distribution unit that distributes the game balls that have entered the type lottery area 408 to either the 15R entrance 731, the 7R entrance 732, or the 3R entrance 733. A distribution device 741 is provided. The type distribution device 741 is a start base 742 to which a game ball entering the type lottery area 408 is first guided, and a game ball that has passed through the start base 742 is guided, and the game ball passes through the 3R entrance 733. A first transfer plate 744 that distributes to either the guide passage 743 or “other” and the game balls distributed to “other” by the first transfer plate 744 are guided, and the game balls are placed into the 7R ball A second transfer plate 747 that distributes to either the 7R guide passage 745 leading to the mouth 732 or the 15R guide passage 746 leading to the 15R entrance 731 is provided.

  More specifically, a start table 742 whose upper surface is inclined downward toward the right is installed at the upper left part of the type lottery area 408, and a first transfer plate 744 is installed at the right side and slightly below the start table 742. The second transfer plate 747 is installed on the right and slightly below the first transfer plate 744, and the 15R guide passage 746 and the 15R entrance 731 are installed on the right and slightly below the second transfer plate 747. ing. The first transfer plate 744 and the second transfer plate 747 include a shaft portion 748 that is pivotally supported so that a central axis extends in the front-rear direction, and a substantially plate-shaped receiving member that protrudes rightward from the shaft portion 748. Part 749. Further, below the first transfer plate 744 and the second transfer plate 747, there are provided a first cam 750 and a second cam 751 that contact (support) the lower surfaces of the first transfer plate 744 and the second transfer plate 747, respectively. The first cam 750 and the second cam 751 are rotated by a motor (not shown), so that the first transfer plate 744 and the second transfer plate 747 are displaced (tilted).

  The first transfer plate 744 of the present embodiment is more advanced than the case where the upper surface of the receiving portion 749 is slightly inclined downward to the right, and is in the advance position that communicates with the upper surface side of the second transfer plate 747 and the advance position. The upper surface of the receiving portion 749 is greatly inclined downward, and is configured to be displaceable between a drop position communicating with the 3R guide passage 743. Further, the second transfer plate 747 has an upper surface of the receiving portion 749 inclined slightly downward toward the right, a forward position that communicates with the 15R guide passage 746, and an upper surface of the receiving portion 749 that is in the forward position. It is configured to be able to displace between a falling position communicating with the 7R guide passage 745 by being largely inclined downward.

  The first cam 750 and the second cam 751 have the same shape and the same size, and, for example, rotate counterclockwise in FIG. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the rotation periods of the first cam 750 and the second cam 751 are not synchronized. For example, the first cam 750 circulates slightly faster than the second cam 751. In addition, the game ball guided to the 3R guide passage 743 is determined to enter the 3R entrance passage 733, and the game ball guided to the 7R guide passage 745 is determined to enter the 7R entrance 732. Then, the game ball guided to the 15R guide passage 746 is configured to determine the entrance to the 15R entrance 731.

  Then, when the game ball guided to the first transfer plate 744 via the start table 742 moves to the right side of the first transfer plate 744, the first transfer plate 744 is in the forward position (range). If there is, the game ball is guided to the second transfer plate 747. Further, when the game ball guided to the second transfer plate 747 moves to the right side of the second transfer plate 747, if the second transfer plate 747 is in the forward position (range), the game ball is 15R. Guided to the guide passage 746.

  On the other hand, when the game ball guided by the second transfer plate 747 moves to the right side of the second transfer plate 747, if the second transfer plate 747 is in the fall position (range), the game ball is 7R. Guided to guide passage 745. Further, when the game ball guided to the first transfer plate 744 moves to the right side of the first transfer plate 744, if the first transfer plate 744 is in the fall position (range), the game ball is 3R. Guided to the guide passage 743. In this embodiment, after the special entry detection switch 461 is detected, any of the 15R entry detection switch 734, the 7R entry detection switch 735, and the 3R entry detection switch 736 is detected. In this case, the corresponding type of jackpot state is started.

  The first and second transfer plates 744 and 747 are configured so that the front and rear widths are wider than the left and right widths (widths in the centrifugal direction). Furthermore, the start base 742, the first transfer plate 744, and the second transfer plate 747 are configured not only to be inclined to the lower right as described above but also to be slightly inclined to the front. That is, the game balls that enter the type lottery area 408 through the safe passage 427 are guided to the start table 742 from the back side of the start table 742, and on the start table 742, the first transfer plate 744, and the second transfer plate 747. It is comprised so that it may move so that it may move to the right front side. In addition, the entrance portions of the 3R guide passage 743, the 7R guide passage 745, and the 15R guide passage 746 cover the range in which the game balls are guided by the first transfer plate 744 and the second transfer plate 747, In addition, a shape (substantially funnel shape) is formed in which the received game balls are gathered into a passage having a width through which the game balls can pass one by one. Further, the first cam 750 and the second cam 751 are arranged corresponding to the rear side of the lower surface of the first transfer plate 744 and the second transfer plate 747 (receiving portion 749), and the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage. 745 so as not to interfere with 745.

  In the present embodiment, the distance of the 3R guide passage 743 is longer than the distance of the 7R guide passage 745, and the distance of the 7R guide passage 745 is longer than the distance of the 15R guide passage 746. Further, the average time required for the 3R entry detection switch 736 to detect a game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408 due to the difference in distance between the guide paths 743, 745, and 746 (3R arrival time). Rather than the 7R arrival time, the average time (7R arrival time) required for the game ball entering the type lottery area 408 to be detected by the 7R entrance detection switch 735 is shorter. The average time (15R arrival time) required for a game ball entering the area 408 to be detected by the 15R entrance detection switch 734 is shorter. For example, the 3R arrival time is set to “9 seconds to 10 seconds”, the 7R arrival time is set to “6 seconds to 7 seconds”, and the 15R arrival time is set to “3 seconds to 4 seconds”.

  The rotating body 414 requires “9 seconds” to make one round. However, the speed of the rotating body 414 is not constant. That is, of the two special pocket portions 416a provided side by side in the rotational direction of the rotating body 414, the upstream special pocket portion 416a that reaches the gate portion 435 first matches the entrance of the safe passage 427 (front position). The time until the downstream special pocket portion 416a that reaches the gate portion 435 later matches the entrance of the safe passage 427 (until the front position) is “1.5 seconds”. Rotating faster than other states. Note that the rotational speed of the rotating body 414 is adjusted by changing the distance between the special pocket portions 416a in the rotating direction of the rotating body 414 (for example, the rotational speed of the rotating body 414 is made constant). Is possible.

  Then, at the timing when the two special pocket portions 416a are successively matched with the gate portion 435 provided in front of the rotating body 414 (without sandwiching the non-special pocket portion 416b), a plurality of game balls are placed on the gate portion 435. In the peripheral portion, when the player is in a standby state (stopped) for entering the pocket portion 416, the game balls continuously enter the two special pocket portions 416a, and as a result, the type lottery area 408. In contrast, two game balls enter in succession. In this case, after a game ball enters the type lottery area 408, the time lag until the next game ball enters the type lottery area 408 is the shortest, and the time is “1.5 seconds”.

  With this configuration, for example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area 408 in succession, the preceding game ball is guided to the 3R guide path 743, and the subsequent game ball is set to the 7R guide path 745. Alternatively, when the situation is guided to the 15R guide passage 746, the preceding game ball enters the 3R entrance 733 (detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736) and the subsequent game. The ball enters the 7R entrance 732 or the 15R entrance 731 (detected by the 7R entrance detection switch 735 or the 15R entrance detection switch 734). Also, for example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area 408 in succession, the preceding game ball is guided to the 7R guide passage 745 and the subsequent game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746. When the preceding game ball enters the 7R entrance 732 (detected by the 7R entrance detection switch 735), the subsequent game ball enters the 15R entrance 731. A ball is detected (detected by the 15R entrance detection switch 734).

  Of the special pocket portions 416a provided side by side in the rotational direction of the rotating body 414, the downstream side special pocket portion 416a matches the inlet of the safe passage 427 (from the front position), and then the upstream side. The time until the special pocket portion 416a on the side coincides with the entrance of the safe passage 427 (until the front position) is “7.5 seconds”. For this reason, even if a game ball that entered the downstream special pocket 416a enters the type lottery area 408, and a game ball that enters the upstream special pocket part 416a enters the type lottery area 408, There is a time lag of “7.5 seconds”. For example, the game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408 first is guided to the 3R guide passage 743, and the game ball that has entered later is guided to the 15R entrance 731. However, before the previous game ball is detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736, the subsequent game ball is not detected by the 15R entrance detection switch 734 (that is, the type lottery area 408 is displayed). Since the difference between the preceding game ball and the subsequent game ball is 7.5 seconds, even if the preceding game ball is guided to the 3R guide passage 743 and the subsequent game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746, , Ahead The game ball to be detected is detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736 in the remaining 1.5 seconds to 2.5 seconds, and the subsequent game ball takes 3 seconds to 4 seconds to be detected by the 15R entrance detection switch 734. The detection of the succeeding game ball cannot pass the detection of the preceding game ball).

  In the present embodiment, the “15 round jackpot” corresponds to the second special game state (the second privilege, the second advantageous state, the second grant) for the “7 round jackpot” and the “7 round jackpot”. “7 round jackpot” corresponds to the first special gaming state (first bonus, first advantageous state, first grant) for “15 round jackpot”, and the second special gaming state for “3 round jackpot” It corresponds to (2nd bonus, 2nd advantageous state, 2nd grant), and “3 round jackpot” is the first special gaming state (1st bonus, 1st round) for “15 round jackpot” and “7 round jackpot” This corresponds to the advantageous state, the first grant). The 15R entrance 731 is configured as a second type entrance means for the 7R entrance 732 and the 3R entrance 733, and the 7R entrance 732 is a first type entrance means for the 15R entrance 731. And configured as a second type entrance means for the 3R entrance 733. The 3R entrance 733 is configured as a first type entrance means for the 15R entrance 731 and the 7R entrance 732. The Further, the 15R entrance detection switch 734 is configured as a second type entrance detection means for the 7R entrance detection switch 735 and the 3R entrance detection switch 736, and the 7R entrance detection switch 735 corresponds to the 15R entrance detection switch 734. Constructed as first type entry detection means and as second type entry detection means for the 3R entry detection switch 736, the 3R entry detection switch 736 includes 15R entry detection switches 734 and 7R entry detection. It is configured as a first type entrance detection means for the switch 735.

  The 15R arrival time corresponds to the second type determination time for the 7R arrival time and the 3R arrival time, the 7R arrival time corresponds to the first type determination time for the 15R arrival time, and the second for the 3R arrival time. Corresponding to the type determination time, the 3R arrival time corresponds to the first type determination time for the 15R arrival time and the 7R arrival time. In addition, the 15R guide passage 746 is configured as a second guide passage (second entry route) for the 7R guide passage 745 and the 3R guide passage 743, and the 7R guide passage 745 is a first guide passage (for the 15R guide passage 746). Configured as a first guide route) and configured as a second guide passage (second input route) for the 3R guide passage 743, the 3R guide passage 743 is connected to the 15R guide passage 746 and the 7R guide passage 745 (the first guide route). 1 entry route).

  The type lottery area 408 is provided near the entrance of the 3R guide passage 743, provided near the entrance of the 7R guide passage 745, and a 3R early detection switch 753 that detects a game ball moving through the 3R guide passage 743. A 7R early detection switch 754 that detects a game ball moving in the 7R guide passage 745 is provided. In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, the central winning unit 37 is provided with a translucent covering cover 756 (a portion with a dotted pattern in FIG. 4) covering the front of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745. The visibility of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 is slightly lowered.

  Further, a translucent 3R seal 757a marked “3R” is attached to the covering cover 756 at a portion covering the entrance of the 3R guide passage 743, and “7R” is attached at a portion covering the entrance of the 7R guide passage 745. A translucent 7R seal 757b described above is attached, and a translucent 15R seal 757c indicated as "15R" is attached at a portion covering the 15R entrance 731. As will be described in detail later, when a game ball is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753, the 7R early detection switch 754, and the 15R incoming detection switch 734, a corresponding sound effect is derived. Basically, if a game ball enters the 3R seal 757a, 7R seal 757b, or 15R seal 757c that looks like a winning opening (if a game ball enters the back side), the corresponding type of big hit state is It can be recognized as being granted. In the present embodiment, the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754 constitute early detection means. Further, the 3R seal 757a, the 7R seal 757b, and the 15R seal 757c constitute an inlet display portion.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the first start winning device 33 a is provided at the lower left and lower right of the central winning unit 37 when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front. The second start winning device 33 b is provided immediately below the central winning unit 37. Furthermore, the second start winning device 33b includes a pair of opening / closing members 33c provided on both sides to open and close. In the present embodiment, a protrusion is provided directly above the second start winning device 33b, and it is virtually impossible to enter the game ball into the second start winning device 33b in a state where the opening / closing member 33c is closed. It has become.

  In addition, although mentioned later in detail, the 1st start winning device 33a and the 2nd starting winning device 33b are the 1st start winning switch 224a and the 2nd start winning a prize as a starting ball detecting means which detects a game ball which entered, respectively. A switch 224b is provided. Then, when a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224a, 224b, a “small hit” that opens the blade member 404 and opens the specific area 401, or a big hit that the variable winning device 32 is opened. A lottery determination is made as to whether or not a “big hit” that causes a state is won. Further, when a winning / losing lottery is performed based on detection by the first starting winning switch 224a and the second starting winning switch 224b, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for teaching the result of the winning / losing lottery. It is configured to be performed. The “winning” in the winning / losing lottery includes “small winning” and “big winning”. Based on the detection of the start winning switches 224a and 224b, either of these “winning” or the blade member 404 is selected. In addition, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not both of the variable prize-winning devices 32 are “open” that are not released.

  In the present embodiment, a common winning / losing lottery is performed between the case where detection is performed by the first start winning switch 224a and the case where detection is performed by the second start winning switch 224b. The device 43 is configured to perform variable display, but a first special display device that performs variable display for teaching the result of a lottery determination performed based on detection by the first start winning switch 224a; It is good also as providing the 2nd special display device in which the variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination performed based on the detection by the 2nd start winning switch 224b is performed. In addition, when such a configuration is adopted, each variable display is stored separately, and the corresponding variable display is digested in the order in which it is stored, or one is given priority over the other. You may comprise. In addition, in the case of adopting such a configuration, the distribution ratios of the types of jackpot states given when winning in the winning lottery may be made different or the same.

  The through gates 34 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, and are configured so that game balls moving in the game area can pass one by one. The through gate 34 is provided with a through gate switch 225 that detects a game ball passing through the through gate 34. When a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not the second start winning device 33b (opening / closing member 33c) is opened. Then, when a winning is made in the ball entry assist lottery, the second start winning device 33b (opening / closing member 33c) is opened for a specified time.

  A special display device 43 and a normal symbol display device 41 are provided on the upper right portion of the game board 30. The special display device 43 of this embodiment is configured by eight lamps, and the normal symbol display device 41 is configured by two lamps. The configurations of the special display device 43 and the normal symbol display device 41 are not particularly limited. For example, the special display device 43 and the normal symbol display device 41 may be configured by a larger number of lamp groups, a 7-segment display device, a dot display device, a liquid crystal display. You may comprise by display apparatuses, such as an apparatus.

  As for the special display device 43, when a game ball enters the first and second start winning devices 33a and 33b, a switching display (variation display) for teaching the lottery result of the success / failure lottery is started for a predetermined time. Thereafter, when the change display is stopped, an aspect corresponding to the result of the winning / failing lottery is displayed. Furthermore, the display content of the special display device 43 is directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later, and the result of the lottery determination is displayed deterministically.

  In addition, when “big hit” is won in the winning / losing lottery, the variable winning device 32 is opened for 30 seconds, or eight game balls are won in the variable winning device 32 as one round. A jackpot that is repeated several times (hereinafter referred to as “direct hit jackpot”) is awarded. In the present embodiment, the special pocket of the specific area 401 as described above, as well as the case where the “big hit” is won in the winning / losing lottery based on the first and second start winning devices 33a and 33b. A big hit state also occurs when a game ball enters the part 416a (a game ball is detected by the special ball detection switch 461).

  In addition, for the normal symbol display device 41, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, a switching display (variation display) for displaying the lottery result of the entrance assist lottery is started, and after a predetermined time, the variation display When stopping the game, a mode corresponding to the result of the entrance assist lottery is displayed. Further, the display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later, and the result of the entrance assist lottery is displayed deterministically.

  In addition, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41, the corresponding fluctuation display is performed after the end of the fluctuation display at that time. It has become. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of variable displays to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine. In this embodiment, the maximum number of variable displays is held up to 4 times, and the number of hold times is a normal number provided on the side of the normal symbol display device 41. The change hold lamp 44 is lit and displayed. The normal variation hold lamp 44 of this embodiment is composed of two lamps, and teaches the number of holds by appropriately switching the lighting, extinguishing and blinking states of each lamp.

  In addition, an upper part of the central winning unit 37 is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and in addition to the variable display of the special display device 43, a decorative design with a predetermined pattern is added as an effect. There is provided a decorative symbol display device 42 for variably displaying. The display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45 described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, auxiliary display contents are determined by the sub-control device 262 based on a command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the result displayed on the special display device 43, The display is performed by a display control device 45 described later.

  Further, when a game ball newly enters the start winning device 33a, 33b during the variation display of the special display device 43, the corresponding variation display is performed after the end of the variation display performed at that time. It is the composition that is called. That is, the variable display on the special display device 43 is put on hold (suspended). The maximum number of fluctuation display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, up to a total of four fluctuations corresponding to the game balls entered in the start winning devices 33a and 33b. Display is suspended.

  Further, the number of suspensions of the variable display of the special display device 43 is lit and displayed by a special variation suspension lamp 46 provided on the side of the special display device 43. The special variation holding lamp 46 is constituted by two lamps, and teaches the number of holdings by appropriately switching the lighting, extinguishing and blinking states of each lamp. In addition, even when a new game ball wins the start winning device 33 during a big hit state or a small hit (while the blade member 404 is opened), the corresponding fluctuation display is also held, and the fluctuation display is a big hit. It is executed after the state or the small hit state ends. Note that the decorative symbol display device 42 may display a hold icon for teaching the number of times the special display device 43 holds the variable display.

  The variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is arranged in the lower center of the game area (game board 30). In addition, the variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is in an open state in which a game ball can be won in a big hit state.

  The game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and a rail 50 that guides a game ball launched from the launch device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30 is attached. As a result, the game balls fired in accordance with the turning operation of the handle 18 are guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into a game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail constituting portion 51 (the upper left portion in FIG. 4). This prevents a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially distal end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail constituting portion 52. The game ball fired at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion of the game board 30.

  In the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. For this reason, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surface of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the launching device 60 may flow backward through the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail constituting portions 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. It is burned.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 connected from a payout mechanism portion 352 described later to the discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate communication passage 73 connected from the payout mechanism portion 352 to the upper plate 19. In addition, there is a predetermined gap between the firing rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball path unit 70 has a game ball dropped from the gap below. A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the plate 15. Thereby, if the game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is returned to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. Discharged.

  3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding a game ball paid out by a payout mechanism portion 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). And a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67. When the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward by an urging force of a spring or the like so that the outlet of the payout passage 67 is almost closed. ing. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the inlet side rear end of the lower plate communication path 71. In addition, the inlets (sphere inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and in the closed state of the front frame set 14, each of the inlets and the discharge passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance. A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. For this reason, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be dispensed flow to the lower plate communication passage 71 side (overflow to the inlet side of the lower plate communication passage 71), and the lower plate connection It will be paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

  In addition, the ball path unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects a game ball located in the lower dish communication path 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower plate communication path 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the full detection switch, the control of prohibiting the launching device 60 from being launched is performed. When the game ball stays in the lower tray communication path 71 and the game ball is not detected by the full detection switch (when it is not detected continuously for a predetermined time), the launching device 60 is allowed to be launched.

  Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. Various control boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10 so as to be lined up, down, left and right, and partially overlapped in the front and back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls And a protective cover made of resin. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack. Therefore, this unit is referred to as a “back pack unit 203”.

  First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, a resin frame cover 213 that covers the central winning unit 37 and the like from behind is provided on the back surface of the game board 30 so as to protrude rearward. Also, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, are detachably attached.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42 a in which an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is formed, and the rear surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed on the side. The display control device 45 is accommodated in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (accommodation box 42a). The sub-control device 262 is accommodated in the substrate box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). The storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Under the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning devices 33a, 33b and the like from the back. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning ports. The game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main controller 261 is mounted is pivotally supported with respect to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

  The main controller 261 is accommodated in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board | substrate box 263 connected with the sealing member becomes a structure which cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

  In addition, the game board 30 corresponds to various winning ports such as a general winning port 31 as a winning means and detects a game ball that has entered the various winning holes (entrance detecting means). Is provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. The first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are respectively provided with a first start winning switch 224a and a second start winning switch 224b as start ball detecting means. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the prize opening switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. . This first board surface relay board relays the prize opening switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261 as main control means, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

  On the other hand, the start winning switches 224a and 224b for detecting the entering to the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, and the winning count switch 437 provided in the central winning unit 37 (the first winning count switch 437a and the second winning ball). Count switch 437b), special entry detection switch 461, non-special entry detection switch 462, round entry detection switch (15R entry detection switch 734, 7R entry detection switch 735, 3R entry detection switch 736), and The early detection switches 753 and 754 are directly connected to the main controller 261 via a connector cable without passing through a relay board.

  The detection results detected by the various entrance detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) corresponding to the winning situation at each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. (Except when detected by the through-gate switch 225, the non-special ball detection switch 462, the round ball detection switches 734, 735, 736, and the early detection switches 753, 754).

  In addition, although not shown in the drawings, the back of the game board 30 is provided with a large winning opening solenoid that opens the large winning opening with the variable winning apparatus 32, and the start winning apparatus 33 has a pair of opening and closing members 33 c. A start-port solenoid that opens and closes is provided. The back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays between the solenoid and the main controller 261.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a unit in which a back pack 351 formed of resin and a payout mechanism portion 352 for a game ball are integrated. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with an open / close axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left part of the back pack unit 203 (upper right part in FIG. 5).

  The external terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numeral is given, but for example, a terminal for outputting information on the current gaming state (such as a big hit state or a high probability state), the front frame set 14 detected by the opening detection switches 91 and 92 described later, A terminal for outputting information related to the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information relating to various error states such as a ball entry error, a lower tray full error, a tank ball no error, a payout error, and the payout control device 311 A terminal for outputting information on the number of winning balls is provided.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 covers the upper portion and the right portion of the substrate box 263 (the left portion in FIG. 5). Thereby, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided at the right part of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge part of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

  The payout mechanism 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 that has two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected. Further, a case rail 357 is formed vertically on the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are paid out appropriately according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

  The payout mechanism 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power from the outside. Yes. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, an AC 24V main power supply via a voltage converter, and the power switch 382a is switched on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  Below the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), there is provided a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported at the left side of the inner frame 12 (right side in FIG. 5) and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and a game ball is placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. In other words, the game balls that have won the respective winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 are gathered through the ball collecting mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. In addition, the out port 36 leads to the discharge passage portion 217 in the same manner, and the game balls that have not won any winning port are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured separately and can be opened and closed independently. However, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also good to do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are detachably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a state where they are overlapped in the front-rear direction. It has been.

  The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are accommodated in the substrate box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually configured by a single board (printed board).

  The payout control device 311 is housed in the substrate box 311a and is fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313a (the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The substrate box 311a in which the dispensing control device 311 is accommodated is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the substrate box 263 in which the main control device 261 is accommodated, so that an unsealed trace of the substrate box 311a remains. It has become.

  In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is accommodated in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

  Each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Further, the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogged in the payout motor unit, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

  Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even if a power failure occurs, the pachinko machine 10 retains the state at the time of the power failure and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure (power recovery). it can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. If you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and hold the power .

  As shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 610 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front surface side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 610, and the inside is operated by rotating to one side. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  In addition, as described above, the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 is formed in the right side frame constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 (FIG. 5). reference). Thereby, it becomes difficult to make a wire etc. approach from the back side of outer frame 11, and to operate locking device 600 with the wire etc. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60). As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side on the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). Each of the front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 includes a detection unit that can move in and out of the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. When the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch main body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and is immersed in the switch main body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is turned off when the detection unit is pressed on the back surface of the front frame set 14, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. A main control device 261 (main board) as a special game state control means and an opening / closing control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer as an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. Various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip but may be configured as a chip for each function.

  The RAM 503 is a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501, the return address of a control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like. ) And a backup area 503a.

  The RAM 503 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

  In the backup area 503a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. (Similarly) is an area for storing stack pointers, values of registers, I / O, and the like. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process. Conversely, the return of each value written to the backup area 503a is the main process at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, and so on). Executed in Note that a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Due to the occurrence, the power failure process (NMI interrupt process) is immediately executed.

  Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub control device 262, a special display device 43, a normal symbol display device 41, etc., which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the special display device 43 and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

  In addition, for convenience, illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted, but the input / output port 505 includes a prize opening switch 221, a count switch 223, start winning prize switches 224a and 224b, a through gate switch 225, a pitch counting switch 437, a special Various detection switches such as a ball detection switch 461, a non-special ball detection switch 462, a round ball detection switch 734, 735, 736, an early detection switch 753, 754, and a blade solenoid that opens and closes various substrates and blade members 404. 405, the rotating body motor 415 that rotates the rotating body 414, the slide motor 725 that reciprocates the slide member 722, the first transfer plate 744, and the second transfer plate 747 are tilted (the first cam 750 and the second cam 751 are moved). Various electrical components such as motors are connected. To have. That is, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output port 505 is configured by these terminal portions.

  A sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic device, various control programs executed by the CPU 551, a ROM 552 that stores fixed value data, and a control program that is stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data during execution, input / output port 554, bus line 555, and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit (not shown) It has. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  A CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via a bus line 555 and a display control device 45 is connected. Further, the speaker SP, the effect button 125, various illumination units, and the lamps 102 and 104 are connected to the input / output port 554.

  The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display control device. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special display device 43 controlled by the main control device 261 displays whether or not it is a big hit, and the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by the sub control device 262. Then, display according to the display of the special display device 43 is performed.

  The payout control device 311 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a are provided.

  The RAM 513 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a. Data is backed up. Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  The backup area 513a has a stack pointer, each register at the time of power off, each register, so that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned off. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the power failure signal SK1 is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a payout permission flag for which the payout control device 311 is set to allow the payout of prize balls, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and the main control device 261 And a command buffer for storing a command transmitted from.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting a prize ball payout permission, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and received, and is initially set. It is turned off when it is restored before the process or power shutdown. In the present embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command for instructing payout of a prize ball, and the main controller 261 having been restored to power. There are three payout return commands to be transmitted in this case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Similar to the payout permission flag, an initial setting process or power-off is performed. It is turned off when returning to the front, and turned off when the command received by the command determination process is determined.

  The command buffer is configured by a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 incorporating the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 through a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main controller 261, a launch controller 312 and a payout device 358 are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

  The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (a ball rental button 121 and a return button 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (a ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. Are electrically connected to each other, and receive a ball lending operation command from the player and output it to the card unit. In a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 can be omitted.

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to drive when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal is detected that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing prohibit button 18 a ( 1 is not operated, the launching device 60 is driven, and a game ball is launched with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18.

  The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. And. An input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 through a bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and a decorative symbol display device 42 as a liquid crystal display device is connected to the output port 529.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526) is performed. Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 526 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it.

  The power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside, generates + 12V power for driving various switches and motors, + 5V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. Note that operation power (+12 V power, +5 V power, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute a power failure process (NMI interrupt processing).

  The power supply unit 541 normally outputs an output of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the process at the time of a power failure even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears backup data in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 in accordance with the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. The

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs lottery using various counter information in the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, based on the detection of the first and second start winning switches 224a and 224b, the jackpot for opening the variable winning device 32 and the specific region 401 (blade member 404) are opened. The winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery for determining whether or not to generate a small hit, and the fluctuation as the changing time random number generating means used for determining the time for changing display (changing time) performed in the special display device 43 Whether to open / close the opening / closing member 33c of the start winning device 33b based on the detection of the time selection counter C2, the initial value random number counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and the through gate switch 225 The regular symbol random number counter C3 used for the entrance assist lottery is used.

  Each of the counters C1, C2, CINI, and C3 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 is provided with a special variable storage area as a storage area for storing the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2, and a normal variable storage area for storing the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3. It has been. Each of the special variable reserved area and the normal variable reserved area includes one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas).

  In addition, the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the variation time selection counter C2, etc. are stored in each holding area of the special variable holding area according to the winning history of the game balls to the first and second start winning devices 33a and 33b. Stored serially. By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the special display device 43 can be suspended up to a total of four times as described above. Further, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 is stored in time series in accordance with the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34 in each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area. By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times as described above.

  To describe each counter in detail, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 399, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 399) as the closing price, 0 is the lower limit value as the starting price. It is the composition which returns to. Normally, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 399), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. On the other hand, the winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the winning random number counter C1 is stored in the winning random number counter buffer. The winning random number stored in the winning random number counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the first or second starting winning device 33a, 33b (detected by the first and second starting winning switches 224a, 224b). The value of the counter C1 is stored in the special fluctuation holding area.

  In the present embodiment, in the success / failure lottery performed based on the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the special variable holding area, one of “small win”, “big hit”, and “out” is won. The number of random number values to be “big hit” is one, and the value is “0”. In other words, winning the “big hit” with a probability of 1/400, the special display device 43 displays the mode corresponding to the “big hit” (a combination of lit lamps) stopped, and a 15-round big hit state occurs. Become.

  Furthermore, the number of random number values for “small hit” is 398, and the value is “2 to 399”. In particular, in the “small hit” of the present embodiment, the “short short hit” in which the specific region 401 (blade member 404) is opened for 0.5 seconds and the “long small” in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. There is a "win". Therefore, among the values of the winning random number counter C1, “2 to 21” corresponds to “long small hit” and “22 to 399” corresponds to “short small hit”. In addition, when “short small hit” is won, the special display device 43 displays a display corresponding to “short small hit” (a combination of lamps that light), and when “long small hit” is won, the special display device In 43, the mode corresponding to the “long small hit” (combination of lamps to be lit) is stopped and the blade member 404 is opened for a specified time.

  Incidentally, among the values of the winning random number counter C1, “1” is a value corresponding to “out”, and in the case of “out”, the special display device 43 has a mode corresponding to “out” (the lighting lamp to be lit). (Combination) is stopped. In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a success / failure determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 corresponds to “small hit” or “big hit”.

  In the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, while the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43, the gaming state is such that the time for variable display (variation time) on the special display device 43 is shortened. Hereinafter, the gaming state in which the variation time of the special display device 43 is shortened is referred to as “time shortening mode”, and the gaming state in which the normal length variation display is performed is referred to as “normal mode”. In the time reduction mode, when the variation display of the special display device 43 that is on hold continuously wins a small hit (the flow of closing the blade member 404, displaying the variation, and then opening it). Are the same, but since the fluctuation time is short), the blade member 404 is opened almost continuously (in a standing manner). For this reason, it is easy to put a plurality of game balls into the specific area 401 of the central winning unit 37 together.

  Further, in the time shortening mode, the opening / closing member 33c of the second starting prize-winning device 33b is in a “highly entering state” in which the opening / closing member 33c is opened relatively frequently, and is normally in the “low entering state” in which the opening / closing member 33c is hardly opened. Compared to the mode, it is easier to enter the game ball into the second start winning device 33b. Specifically, in the normal mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 41 for displaying the result of the entrance assist lottery performed based on the passing of the game ball through the through gate 34 is 10 seconds. The opening time of the opening / closing member 33c when winning in the assist lottery is 0.4 seconds. On the other hand, in the time reduction mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 is 0.5 seconds, and the opening time of the opening / closing member 33c when winning in the ball-assisted assist lottery is 2 seconds.

  The variation time selection counter C2 is configured such that, for example, one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9), it returns to the lower limit value of 0. The variation time selection counter C2 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the variation time selection counter C2 is stored in the variation time selection counter buffer. The value of the variable time selection counter C2 stored in the variable time selection counter buffer is stored in the special variable holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first and second start winning devices 33a and 33b. .

  In the present embodiment, in the normal mode, the variation time of the special display device 43 is “2 seconds” or “3 seconds” in the case of “small hit” in the winning lottery. Note that the ROM 502 has first and second variation time selection tables that are referred to when determining whether the value of the variation time selection counter C2 corresponds to “2 seconds variation” or “3 seconds variation”. Is provided. In addition, in the normal mode, the variation time of the special display device 43 is “7 seconds” when the winning / losing lottery results in “big hit” or “out”. Further, in the time reduction mode, the variation time of the special display device 43 is uniformly “0.1 seconds” regardless of the result of the lottery.

  In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, the sizes of the winning random number counter C1 and the variation time selection counter C2 are preferably different prime numbers, and are preferably set to values that are not synchronized in any case.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, one by one is added in the range of 0 to 9, for example, and the upper limit value (that is, 9 is reached and then the lower limit value is returned to 0). The random number counter C3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 is acquired when the game ball passes through the left or right through gate 34. The number of random number values to be won is 8, and the range is “1 to 8.” When the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 is acquired, the normal symbol display device 41 displays the fluctuation for a predetermined time. After being performed, the symbol corresponding to winning or losing (in this example, “0” or “−”) is stopped and displayed, and the second start winning device 33b (opening / closing member 33c) is opened for a predetermined time. .

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is broadly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, first, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described, and then main processing will be described.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example.

  In FIG. 11, first, in step S301, reading processing of various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. When a game ball is paid out according to the detection of the switch, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is added, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection signal is not input, this processing is terminated as it is. In the external output process of the normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311. In addition, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

  In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example).

  In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the variable time selection counter C2, and the normal symbol random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, 399, 9, 9 respectively). When it reaches, each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, and C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step S304, a start winning process associated with winning in the first and second starting winning devices 33a, 33b is executed, and in step S305, a through gate passing process accompanying passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. To do. Further, in step S306, a counting process for entering the specific area 401 of the central winning unit 37 is executed, and in step S307, detection by the special pitch detection switch 461 (safe via the special pocket portion 416a). The special winning process associated with the entry into the passage 427) is executed, and in step S308, the non-special entry detection switch 462 detects that the entry (the entry into the out passage 428 via the non-special pocket portion 416b). Execute special winning process.

  In the subsequent step S309, an early detection process accompanying detection by the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754 is executed, and in step S310, detection by the round entry detection switches 734, 735, 736 (15R entry entrance) 731, 7R entrance 732, 3R entrance 733) is executed. After step S310, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

  Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, in the execution area of each special variable hold area and each hold area, a random number storage area for storing the value of the winning random number counter C1, a variable time random number storage area for storing the value of the variable time selection counter C2, and a reserved change A first start winning flag for determining whether or not the display is based on a ball entering the first start winning device 33a is provided. In the present embodiment, the special variation holding area (aside from the region for storing the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the variation time selection counter C2) is used in the winning / not-to-win lottery based on the entrance to the start winning devices 33a and 33b. A jackpot occurrence flag indicating that “Big jackpot” has been won, a losing flag indicating “Loose”, a long jackpot flag indicating that “Long jackpot” has been won, and “Short jackpot” being won A short small hit occurrence flag shown is provided. In addition, a 2-second variation flag, a 3-second variation flag, and a 7-second variation flag indicating the variation time in the special display device 43 are provided.

  First, in step S501, the value of the holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by the game balls entering the first and second start winning devices 33a and 33b is an upper limit value (in this embodiment, “ 4 ") or less. If a negative determination is made in step S501, the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning device 33a based on the detection information of the first start winning switch 224a. If a negative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S509 described later. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the hold counter Na is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S504, the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 updated in the random number updating process in step S303 are stored in the first area among the reserved areas in which the special variable reservation area is free. In step S505, the first start winning flag in the holding area in which the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are stored is turned on.

  In the subsequent step S506, a success / failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable suspension area is a value corresponding to “small hit” or “big hit”. Details of the success / failure determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S507, a variation time determination process for determining the variation time in the special display device 43 is performed based on the value of the variation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area. Details of the variation time determination process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S508, a starting command setting process is performed. In the advance command, the variation information (predetermined information used to determine the content of the variation display) stored on hold is entered into either the first start winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b. Information indicating whether the information is based on variation information (first variation display or second variation display), information indicating “small hit” or “big hit”, and information indicating variation time are included in the next external output process (step S201). And the sub-control device 262.

  Here, details of the success / failure determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the type of small hit (long small hit, short small hit) is determined in the success / failure determination process.

  First, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area matches “0” that is a value corresponding to “big hit”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state occurs, the process ends after turning on the jackpot occurrence flag in step S5102.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5101, whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable holding area matches “1” corresponding to “out” in step S5103. Determine whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if it is determined to be “displacement”, the disengagement flag is turned on in step S5104, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if it is determined that “small hit”, in step S5105, the value of the winning random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable holding area is set to “long small It is determined whether or not it matches any of “2 to 21” that is a value corresponding to “win”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, the long small hit occurrence flag is turned on in step S5106, and then the process ends.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S5105, that is, if it is determined that “short short hit”, in step S5107, the short short hit occurrence flag is turned on, and then this process is terminated.

  Next, the variation time determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the time reduction mode is set. If the determination in step S5201 is affirmative, in step S5202, the 0.1 second fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the special display device 43 is 0.1 second is set to ON. This process is terminated. In other words, in the time shortening mode, the variation display variation time is uniformly set to 0.1 seconds regardless of whether the result of the winning / losing lottery is a big hit, a long little hit, a short little hit, or a miss.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5201, it is determined in step S5203 whether or not the long small hit occurrence flag has been set in the determination processing performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5203, that is, if it is determined that the “long small hit” is determined, in step S5204, the value of the variation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is “0”. 1 ”is discriminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5204, that is, if the value of the variation time selection counter C2 is any one of “3 to 9”, the variation time of the variation display performed by the special display device 43 in step S5205. After turning on the 3-second fluctuation flag indicating that the time is 3 seconds, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, in step S5206, after turning on the 2-second variation flag indicating that the variation display variation time performed in the special display device 43 is 2 seconds, this processing is performed. finish.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5203, it is determined in step S5207 whether or not the short small hit occurrence flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5207, that is, if “short short hit” occurs, the value of the variation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is “0, 1” in step S5208. It is discriminated whether it matches either of the above.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S5208, in step S5205, the 3-second variation flag indicating that the variation display variation time performed in the special display device 43 is 3 seconds is turned on, and then this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5208, in step S5206, the 2-second variation flag indicating that the variation display variation time performed in the special display device 43 is 2 seconds is set on, and then this process is performed. finish. That is, there is a higher possibility that a longer variation time (3 seconds) is selected when “long small hit” occurs than when “short small hit” occurs.

  Further, when a negative determination is made in step S5207, that is, in the case of a big hit or miss, a 7-second fluctuation indicating that the fluctuation display fluctuation time performed in the special display device 43 is 7 seconds in step S5209. After the flag is turned on, this process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, after the process of step S508, or when a negative determination is made in step S502, it is determined in step S509 whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning device 33b. The determination is based on the detection information of the winning switch 224b. If a negative determination is made in step S509, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made, in step S510, the hold counter Na is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S511, each value of the winning random number counter C1 and the variation time selection counter C2 is stored in the first area among the reserved areas in which the special variation reservation area is vacant. In step S512, determination processing is performed. Note that the success / failure determination process in step S512 is the same as the success / failure determination process in step S506, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In a subsequent step S513, a variation time determination process is performed. Note that the success / failure determination processing in step S513 is the same as the variation time determination processing in step S507, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. After step S513, in step S514, a starting command setting process is performed, and this process ends.

  Next, the through gate passing process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on detection information of the through gate switch 225.

  If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of suspensions of the variable display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal holding counter Nc <4, the process proceeds to step S603, where the normal holding counter Nc is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S604, a random number related to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 updated by the random number update process in step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the normal variation holding area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is terminated.

  Next, the ball counting process in step S306 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7201, it is determined whether or not there is a detection of a first entrance count switch 437a provided in the first introduction passage 718a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7201, it is determined in step S7202 whether there is a detection of the second entrance count switch 437b provided in the second introduction passage 718b. If a negative determination is made in step S7202, the first incoming command that informs the sub-control device 262 that there has been an entrance to the first entrance opening 403a (first introduction passage 718a) in step S7203. Set.

  After step S7203, in step S7204, 1 is added to the value of the entrance counter as the first counting means for grasping the number of game balls in the specific area 401. In the subsequent step S7205, a monitoring timer setting process that is considered in the remaining sphere monitoring process is performed. In the present embodiment, “10000” is set in the monitoring timer every time the incoming count switch 437 is detected. Even if a predetermined numerical value is already set in the monitoring timer, “10000” is overwritten. The monitoring timer is decremented by 1 in normal processing (remaining sphere monitoring processing described later) performed every 4 mec. After the step S7205, the present process is terminated.

  Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S7202, that is, when both the first entrance count switch 437a and the second entrance count switch 437b are detected, the sub-control device 262 is determined in step S7206. Both incoming ball commands that indicate that the ball has entered both the first ball opening 403a (first introduction passage 718a) side and the second ball opening portion 403b (second introduction passage 718b) side. Set.

  As described above, the first entrance count switch 437a and the second entrance count switch 437b are located in the vicinity of the exits of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b at the same distance from each exit. When the game balls are detected by the first entrance count switch 437a and the second entrance count switch 437b (substantially) at the same time, each of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b is provided. The game balls are discharged from the outlet almost simultaneously, and as a result, the game balls fall on the first wing part 714 and the second wing part 715 of the route distribution device 703 almost simultaneously.

  After step S7206, in step S7207, 2 is added to the value of the ball entry counter as the first counting means for grasping the number of game balls in the specific area 401. Thereafter, the monitoring timer is set in step S7205 described above, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7201, it is determined in step S7208 whether or not there is a detection of the second incoming count switch 437b. If a negative determination is made in step S7208, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7208, in step S7209, the sub-control device 262 is informed that there has been a ball entering the second ball opening 403b (second introduction passage 718b) side. 2. Set the ball entry command.

  After step S7209, in step S7204 described above, 1 is added to the value of the entrance counter, and in step S7205, the monitoring timer is set, and then the present process is terminated.

  When the first control command 262 is received on the side of the sub-control device 262, a normal input sound effect is derived, and a first unillustrated disposition arranged behind the first wing 714 of the route distribution device 703 is used. When the incoming lamp is turned on and a second incoming command is received, a normal incoming sound effect is derived, and a second incoming ball (not shown) disposed behind the second wing 715 of the route distribution device 703 is derived. When the lamps are turned on and both entry commands are received, a special entry sound effect is derived and the first entry lamp and the second entry lamp are quickly blinked.

  Next, the special winning process in step S307 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7301, it is determined whether or not there is game ball detection information by the special ball detection switch 461. If a negative determination is made in step S7301, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7301, it is determined in step S7302 whether or not a big hit state is being considered in consideration of a big hit flag that will be described later. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7302, the process ends. That is, during the big hit state, even if the game ball enters the safe passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and the game ball is detected by the special ball detection switch 461, The right to generate a jackpot is not granted.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7302, it is determined in step S7303 whether or not a special winning flag indicating that the special ball detection switch 461 has been detected is already turned on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7303, the present process ends. That is, in a state where it has already been determined to generate a jackpot state (the right to generate a jackpot state has been granted), even if the special entry detection switch 461 is repeatedly detected, that amount The jackpot is invalid.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7303, the special winning flag is turned on in step S7304, and then the present process is terminated. In the present embodiment, at the stage where the special entry detection switch 461 is detected, only the right to generate a jackpot state is granted, and what type of jackpot state is determined is determined. In addition, the jackpot state is not started until the type is determined.

  Next, the non-special winning process in step S308 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not there is game ball detection information by the non-special ball detection switch 462. If a negative determination is made in step S7401, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7401, the value of the entrance counter is decremented by 1 in step S7402, and then this process ends.

  Next, the early detection process in step S309 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7501, it is determined whether or not the 3R early detection switch 753 has been detected. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7501, in step S7502, a 15R jackpot flag indicating 15 round jackpot, a 7R jackpot flag indicating 7 round jackpot, or 3R indicating 3 round jackpot It is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags is set on.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7502, that is, if the big hit state type has not yet been determined, 3R early detection indicating that the 3R early detection switch 753 has been detected in step S7503. After setting the detection flag to ON, the process proceeds to step S7504. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7502, that is, if it has already been determined to the type of jackpot state, the process proceeds directly to step S7504.

  In subsequent step S7504, 1 is subtracted from the value of the ball entering counter, and in step S7505, 1 is added to the value of the ball clogging counter as the second counting means for grasping the number of game balls in the specific area 401. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7501, it is determined in step S7506 whether or not the 7R early detection switch 754 has been detected. If a negative determination is made in step S7506, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7506, it is determined in step S7507 whether any of the 15R jackpot flag, the 7R jackpot flag, or the 3R jackpot flag is set on.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7507, in step S7508, the 7R early detection flag indicating that the 7R early detection switch 754 has been detected is set on, and then the process proceeds to step S7504. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7507, the process directly proceeds to step S7504. As described above, in step S7504, 1 is subtracted from the value of the ball entry counter. In step S7505, 1 is added to the value of the ball clogging counter, and then the present process is terminated.

  Next, the type entry process in step S310 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7601, it is determined whether or not a special winning flag is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S7601, the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7601, it is determined in step S7602 whether or not the 15R entry detection switch 734 has been detected. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7602, in step S7603, a 15R jackpot flag indicating that 15 rounds are jackpot is set on.

  Thereafter, in step S7604, 1 is subtracted from the value of the entrance counter, and then this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7602, it is determined in step S7605 whether or not the 7R entry detection switch 735 has been detected. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7605, in step S7606, a 7R jackpot flag indicating 7R jackpot is set on. Thereafter, in step S7607, the value of the ball clogging counter is decremented by 1, and then this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7605, it is determined in step S7608 whether or not the 3R entry detection switch 736 has been detected. If a negative determination is made in step S7608, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7608, in step S7609, a 3R jackpot flag indicating that it is a 3-round jackpot is set on. Thereafter, in step S7607 described above, the value of the ball clogging counter is decremented by 1, and then this process ends.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process. In step S401, the CPU 501 stores the power interruption occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and performs the NMI interruption process. finish.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner in the payout control device 311, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started upon reset when power is turned on.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control device (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. Wait processing is performed for about 2 seconds. In the subsequent step S102, RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S111 to clear (erase) the backup data. To do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S104 whether or not occurrence information of power supply interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, no backup data is stored. In this case as well, the process proceeds to step S111. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. That is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. If the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case, the process also proceeds to step S111.

  In the process of step S111, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like that are the sub-side control devices. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S112 and the like). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S112 and the like). Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S112 or the like). That is, in step S112, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S113, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S114, and the routine proceeds to normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed (step S103: NO), it is a condition that the information on occurrence of power interruption is set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. In addition, the process at the time of power recovery (process at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power interruption is restored, and in step S108, the information on the occurrence of the power interruption is cleared. In step S109, a command for returning the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off is transmitted, and in step S110, the used register is returned from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S114, and the routine proceeds to normal processing described later.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processing of steps S201 to S212 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the initial value random number counter updating processing of step S215 is executed with the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display device 43 and the second start winning device 33b updated in the previous process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is transmitted to each sub-side. External output processing that is transmitted to the control device is executed.

  For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the decorative symbol variation, a variation pattern command or the like is transmitted to the sub-control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command is a command that is output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative design display device 42 to perform a display effect in accordance with the display performed on the special display device 43. It corresponds to information. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 receiving the variation pattern command or the like determines the variation mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the command, and displays the variation mode on the decorative symbol display device 42. An instruction is issued to the control device 45.

  In step S202, the winning ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S203, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  In the subsequent step S204, a bonus jackpot setting process is executed. In this process, a big hit based on the fact that a game ball that has entered the specific area 401 of the central winning unit 37 enters the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body unit 410 and is detected by the special ball detection switch 461, etc. Settings are made. Details of the bonus jackpot setting process will be described later.

  In step S205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the special display device 43 is set as to what kind of control is performed in the special display device 43, and the jackpot determination and the setting of the decorative pattern effect pattern in the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. Is called. Details of the first display control process will be described later.

  In step S206, variable winning device control processing is executed. In this process, the control content of the variable winning device 32 is set as to what control is performed in the variable winning device 32. Thereby, when it becomes a big win state (special game state), the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening) is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. Details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S207, a blade member opening / closing process is executed. In this process, the control content of the blade member 404 (blade solenoid 405) is set. Details of the blade member opening / closing process will be described later.

  In step S208, a second display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are set as to what kind of control is performed in the normal symbol display device 41. Details of the second display control process will be described later.

  In step S209, an opportunity handling unit control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the start winning device 33 is set as to what control is performed in the start winning device 33. Details of the trigger handling unit control processing will be described later.

  In step S210, a remaining sphere monitoring process is executed. In this process, a process for confirming whether or not a game ball is present in the specific area 401 of the central winning unit 37 is performed. Details of the remaining sphere monitoring process will be described later.

  In step S211, a preceding effect process is executed. In this process, after the right to generate a jackpot state is given by the game ball that has entered the central winning unit 37, the type of jackpot is determined, and the game tempo is deteriorated due to the time lag until the jackpot state is started. Processing for suppression is performed. Details of the preceding effect process will be described later.

  In step S212, an accessory driving process is performed. In this processing, processing for operating the rotating body unit 410, the slide unit 721, and the type distribution device 741 of the central winning unit 37 is performed. That is, for the rotating body unit 410, the rotating body 414 is rotated counterclockwise at a constant speed in a plan view, and for the slide unit 721, the slide member 722 is slid left and right at a predetermined rhythm (reciprocating operation), The type distribution device 741 is controlled to rotate the first cam 750 and the second cam 751 counterclockwise at a predetermined rhythm when viewed from the front.

  Thereafter, in step S213, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power supply interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S214 whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal processing (this embodiment) It is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already passed, an affirmative determination is made in step S214, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S214, the process proceeds to step S215, and the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example). And after the said process, it transfers to step S213. That is, at the time of determination in step S214, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated within the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing. Will be executed repeatedly.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S212 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be updated at random by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time.

  Now, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S213: YES), the power is cut off, so that the processing after step S216 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power interruption. Is called. In the power failure process, first, in step S216, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step S217, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area. In step S218, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 503a. To remember. Thereafter, in step S219, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). In step S220, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the RAM access is prohibited in step S221, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed.

  Note that the processing in step S213 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in steps S201 to S212, or at the end of one cycle of the processing in step S215 performed within the remaining time. Running on. Therefore, in the normal process of the main controller 261, the occurrence information of the power interruption is confirmed at the end of each process, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is less than that in the middle of each process. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S216), it is possible to prevent data from being changed when the power is shut off, and to reliably store the state before the power is shut off. .

  Next, the accessory jackpot setting process in step S204 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a special winning flag (see the special winning process in FIG. 18) indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special winning detection switch 461 is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1502, and the special prize flag is turned off.

  In the following step 1503, it is determined whether or not a 15R jackpot flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the 15R entrance detection switch 734 is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, in step S1504, “15” is set in the round number counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds in the jackpot state. Further, in step S1505, the big hit flag indicating that the big hit state is being set is set on, and in step S1506, the first variable flag indicating that the variable winning device 32 is being controlled for opening / closing is set on. In addition, in step S1507, “7500” is set in the first variable timer used for opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32, and in step S1508, “8” is set in the winning counter, and then this process is terminated. To do.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1503, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not a 7R jackpot flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the 7R entry detection switch 735 is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1509, “7” is set in the round number counter in step S1510.

  After step S1510, in step S1511, it is determined whether or not a preceding opening effect, which will be described in detail later, is performed. The opening effect is an effect that is performed at the beginning of the jackpot state to announce (and excite) the start of the jackpot state. On the other hand, in the preceding opening effect, the game ball that has entered the 3R guide passage 743 or 7R guide passage 745 has not yet been detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736 or 7R entrance detection switch 735. Despite being in a state, it is certain that such a game ball will eventually be detected by the 3R entry detection switch 736 or the 7R entry detection switch 735, and the corresponding jackpot state will be given, Pseudo effect imitating the opening effect derived for the purpose of teaching that the corresponding jackpot state occurs when the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754 is detected It is. In the present embodiment, although the preceding opening effect is not performed during the jackpot state, substantially the same mode as the opening effect (the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 42, the audio mode, the lighting mode of various lamps) is derived. It is configured as follows.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1511, in step S1512 a setting is made to execute the 3R jackpot (or 7R jackpot) jackpot state with a “shortened pattern”. As will be described in detail later, there are a normal pattern in which an opening period for performing the opening effect is set and a shortened pattern in which the opening period is omitted in the 3R jackpot or 7R jackpot state. Therefore, when the preceding opening effect is performed, instead of selecting the pattern in which the opening effect in the big hit state is omitted, the opening effect is prevented from becoming too long.

  After step S1512 or when a negative determination is made in step S1511, the process proceeds to step S1505 described above.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1509, it is determined in step S1513 whether or not a 3R jackpot flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the 3R incoming detection switch 736 is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S1513, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1513, “3” is set in the round number counter in step S1514. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1511 described above.

  Next, the first display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the jackpot state is in effect by referring to the jackpot flag. If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the jackpot state is in effect, this processing is terminated as it is. That is, during the jackpot state, the variable display is not newly started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S802 whether or not a special winning flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special winning detection switch 461 is on. The special winning flag is turned on when the special winning detection switch 461 is detected (see step S7304 of the special winning process), and is turned off when the jackpot flag is turned on (an after-mentioned accessory). (See step S1502 of the jackpot setting process). If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S802, it is determined in step S803 whether or not the open variation flag is set to ON. The open variation flag is entered in the specific area 401 when the blade member 404 is displaced to the open position based on the small hit and the central winning unit 37 is in the open state (the specific area 401 is open). The game ball that has been balled is still in the specific area 401, and the special winning flag is turned on or is not turned into a big hit state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, this processing is terminated as it is. That is, in the state where the central winning unit 37 is in the open state, the special display device 43 is not subjected to the variable display.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S803, it is determined in step S804 whether or not the special display device 43 is performing variable display by looking at the setting status of the first display flag. When the first display flag is set to ON, it is considered that the variable display is being performed, and when the first display flag is OFF, it is considered that the variable display is not being performed. As will be described in detail later, the first display flag is turned on when the variable display of the special display device 43 is started (see step S808), and when the variable display of the special display device 43 is stopped and displayed ( (See Step S812).

  If a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, a state where the jackpot state, the right of the jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, the variable display of the special display device 43 is being displayed, and the central winning unit If it is not in any open state of 37, the process proceeds to step S805, and the value of the holding counter Na for counting the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by entering the start winning devices 33a and 33b is greater than zero. Determine whether it is larger. If a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if no change display is stored on hold, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S805, that is, if even one variable display is held, 1 is subtracted from the value of the hold counter Na in step S806.

  In a succeeding step S807, a process for shifting the data stored in the special variable holding area is executed. This shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the special variable hold area to the execution area side, and the hold first area → execution area, hold second area → hold The data in each area is shifted such as the first area, the reserved third area → the reserved second area, the reserved fourth area → the reserved third area. In the shift process, not only the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the variation time selection counter C2, but also a big hit occurrence flag, a losing flag, a long little hit occurrence flag, a short little hit occurrence flag, a 2 second fluctuation flag, 3 seconds The on / off setting state of the fluctuation flag and the 7-second fluctuation flag is also shifted.

  In the subsequent step S808, a variable display setting process is performed. Here, the details of the variable display setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the jackpot occurrence flag in the execution area of the special variable suspension area is set to ON, thereby determining whether or not the variation information corresponds to “big hit”. As a modified example, in the same way as the success / failure determination process of the start winning process, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special variable holding area is once again referred to the success / failure determination table. It may be determined whether or not it is “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, if a “big hit” is won in the winning / failing lottery, a direct hit indicating that “big hit” is won in the winning / losing lottery in step S902 (that “direct hitting big hit”). Set the jackpot flag on. After step S902, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the 7-second variation flag in the execution area of the special variation holding area is set to ON.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, a variation pattern command is determined in step S904 in order to determine a variation pattern (big success variation pattern) that is a big hit and to transmit the variation pattern (variation information) also to the sub-control device 262. Set up. In a succeeding step S905, a value “1750” corresponding to 7 seconds is set for the first display timer used for fluctuation control of the special display device 43. The first display timer is a means for measuring the variation time (residual time for variation display) in the special display device 43, and is used when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the beginning of the variation display. . After step S905, the process proceeds to step S938.

  If a negative determination is made in step S903, in step S906, the fluctuation time is shortened to determine a fluctuation pattern that is a big hit (big hit reduction pattern), and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation information) is further determined by the sub-control device. In order to transmit to 262, the variation pattern command is set. In a succeeding step S907, a value “25” corresponding to 0.1 second is set for the first display timer used for variation control of the special display device 43. After step S907, the process proceeds to step S938.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined in step S908 whether or not it is “out” by determining whether or not the out flag in the execution area of the special variable holding area is set on. As a modified example, in the same manner as the success / failure determination process of the start winning process, it is determined again whether or not it is “out” by determining whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the execution area is “1”. It may be determined.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S908, that is, if it is “out”, it is determined in step S909 whether or not the 7-second variation flag in the execution area of the special variation holding area is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S909, in step S910, a variation pattern to be deviated (outgoing variation pattern) is determined, and further, a variation pattern command is set so that the variation pattern is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262. I do. Thereafter, in step S911, a value “1750” corresponding to 7 seconds is set to the first display timer, and then the process proceeds to step S938.

  If a negative determination is made in step S909, in step S912, a fluctuation pattern (displacement shortening pattern) that is deviated by reducing the fluctuation time is determined, and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation information) is further determined by the sub-control device. In order to transmit to 262, the variation pattern command is set. In the subsequent step S913, a value “25” corresponding to 0.1 second is set for the first display timer used for variation control of the special display device 43. After step S913, the process proceeds to step S938.

  If a negative determination is made in step S908, that is, if “small hit”, the blade opening flag is turned on in step S914. In a succeeding step S915, it is determined whether or not the long small hit occurrence flag in the execution area of the special variation holding area is ON. As a modified example, in the same manner as the determination process of whether or not the start winning process is performed, it is determined once again whether or not the value of the variation time selection counter C2 in the execution area matches any of “2 to 21”. It may be determined whether or not “Long Bonus” is won.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S915, that is, if it is “long small hit”, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the execution area 3-second variation flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S916 is affirmative, in step S917, a variation pattern (3 seconds per long small portion) in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds after the variation display for 3 seconds is performed on the special display device 43. In order to transmit the fluctuation pattern to the sub-control device 262, a fluctuation pattern command is set.

  In the subsequent step S918, a value “750” corresponding to 3 seconds is set to the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S919, “750” corresponding to 3 seconds is set to the opening / closing control timer used for opening / closing control of the blade member 404. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the fluctuation display for 3 seconds. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S938.

  If a negative determination is made in step S916, it is determined in step S920 whether or not the execution area 2-second fluctuation flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S920 is affirmative, in step S921, a variation pattern (2 seconds per long small portion) in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds after the variation display for 2 seconds is performed on the special display device 43. In order to transmit the fluctuation pattern to the sub-control device 262, a fluctuation pattern command is set.

  In a succeeding step S922, a value “500” corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the first display timer. In step S923, “500” corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the open / close control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the fluctuation display for 2 seconds. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S938.

  If a negative determination is made in step S920, in step S924, the fluctuation time is shortened to determine a fluctuation pattern that is a long small hit (long small hit reduction pattern), and the fluctuation pattern (variation information) is determined. Is set to the sub-control device 262 to set a variation pattern command.

  In a succeeding step S925, a value “25” corresponding to 0.1 second is set to the first display timer. In step S926, “25” corresponding to 0.1 second is set to the open / close control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is released after the special display device 43 performs the fluctuation display for 0.1 second. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S938.

  If a negative determination is made in step S915, that is, if “short short hit”, it is determined in step S927 whether or not the execution area 3-second variation flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S927, in step S928, a fluctuation pattern (3 seconds per short short) in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds after the fluctuation display for 3 seconds is performed on the special display device 43. In order to transmit the fluctuation pattern to the sub-control device 262, a fluctuation pattern command is set.

  In a succeeding step S929, a value “750” corresponding to 3 seconds is set to the first display timer. Further, in step S930, “750” corresponding to 3 seconds is set to an opening / closing control timer used for opening / closing control of the blade member 404. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the fluctuation display for 3 seconds. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S938.

  If a negative determination is made in step S927, it is determined in step S931 whether or not the execution area 2-second fluctuation flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S931, in step S932, a variation pattern (2 seconds per short short) in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds after the variation display for 2 seconds is performed on the special display device 43. In order to transmit the fluctuation pattern to the sub-control device 262, a fluctuation pattern command is set.

  In a succeeding step S933, a value “500” corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the first display timer. In step S934, “500” corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the open / close control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the fluctuation display for 2 seconds. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S938.

  If a negative determination is made in step S931, in step S935, the fluctuation pattern is shortened to determine a fluctuation pattern that is a short short hit (short short hit reduction pattern), and the fluctuation pattern (variation information) is determined. Is set to the sub-control device 262 to set a variation pattern command.

  In a succeeding step S936, a value “25” corresponding to 0.1 second is set to the first display timer. In step S937, “25” corresponding to 0.1 second is set to the open / close control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is released after the special display device 43 performs the fluctuation display for 0.1 second. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S938.

  In step S938, the first display flag indicating that the special display device 43 is performing the variable display is set to ON. After step S938, this process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 23, if an affirmative determination is made in step S804, that is, if a variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S809 to perform a first display timer subtraction process. That is, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 1 every 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S810, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed with reference to the value of the first display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S810.

  If a negative determination is made in step S810, in step S811, a switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variable display) of the special display device 43 is performed, and this process is terminated. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output process in the next normal process. Specifically, the combination of the lamps to be lit is set to be switched sequentially. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the special display device 43 is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S810, that is, if the variable display stop timing in the special display device 43 has been reached, the first display flag is turned off in step S812.

  In the subsequent step S813, stop display setting for performing stop display on the special display device 43 is performed. Based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal to stop display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, in the case of “big hit”, a plurality of lamps constituting the special display device 43 are stopped and displayed (for example, lit only for a few seconds) in a mode (combination) corresponding to “big hit”, and “off”. In the case, the stop is displayed in a mode corresponding to “displacement”, in the case of “long small hit”, the stop is displayed in a mode corresponding to “long small hit”, and in the case of “short small hit” Stop display in a mode corresponding to “Short Short Hit”.

  In subsequent step S814, discrimination information setting processing is performed. Details of the discrimination information setting process will be described later. After step S814, this process ends.

  Here, the discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the direct hit jackpot flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that a big win has been won in the winning or failing lottery, the jackpot setting after step S1002 is performed.

  Specifically, in step S1002, a jackpot flag indicating whether or not the jackpot state as the special gaming state is being set is turned on.

  In the subsequent step S1003, the first variable flag indicating whether or not the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is in the open state is set to ON. In the present embodiment, the variable winning device 32 is opened when the first variable flag is turned on.

  Subsequently, in step S1004, it is a means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32 and the like, and a first variable timer is set that indicates whether or not a specified time has passed since the opening. In this example, “7500” corresponding to 30 seconds is set as the value for the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum opening time per round (the longest time during which the variable winning device 32 is opened) is 30 seconds.

  Next, in step S1005, a round number counter is set that indicates the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of special prize occurrences, that is, the number of executions of the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32). Here, “15” indicating the total number of rounds is set as a value corresponding to “direct hit big hit”.

  In the subsequent step S1006, a winning counter setting process for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32 is performed, and then the present process is terminated. In this example, “8” indicating the maximum number of balls entered per round is set as a value. In addition, in the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11), it is determined whether there is a ball entering the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223, and there is a ball entering the variable winning device 32. When determined, the value of the winning counter is decremented by 1.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the jackpot does not correspond, that is, it is determined that the player is out of step, the process proceeds to step S1007.

  In step S1007, it is determined whether or not a variation counter is set. The fluctuation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time reduction mode (high pitching state). In the present embodiment, the time reduction mode is after the end of the jackpot state until the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43, and “4” is set as the counter value after the end of the jackpot as will be described later. .

  If the counter value of the variation counter is “0”, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the variation counter is set (when the counter value is other than “0”), it is considered that the time reduction mode is in effect, and in step S1008, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1. The process proceeds to S1009.

  In step S1009, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the variation counter is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the fourth variation display after the end of the jackpot (after the time reduction mode is given). If the value of the variation counter is “0”, a process for turning off the time reduction mode flag is performed in step S1010, a process for turning on the normal mode flag is performed in step S1011, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1009 that the counter value of the variation counter is not “0”, the present process is terminated.

  Next, the variable winning device control process in step S206 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1201, the big hit / medium flag is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the big hit is being hit. If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the first variable timer in step S1202. In a succeeding step S1203, it is determined whether or not the first variable flag is ON.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the process proceeds to step S1204, whether or not the count value of the first variable timer is “0”, that is, this step. In S1204, it is determined whether or not the open time of the variable winning device 32 per round set when the first variable flag is turned on remains.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1204, the process proceeds to step S1205, and whether or not the value of the winning counter is “0”, that is, the number of game balls won to the variable winning device 32 is per round. It is determined whether or not the prescribed number (eight in this example) has been reached. If a negative determination is made in step S1205, that is, if the timing for turning the variable prize-winning device 32 to the closed state (round end timing) has not yet arrived, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1204 or step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1206, and whether or not the counter value of the round number counter is “0”, that is, the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is released). ) Has reached the specified number of times.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, an end setting process is performed in step S1207, and this process ends. Details of the end setting process will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1206, that is, if the number of rounds has not reached the prescribed number, round feed processing is performed in step S1208, and this processing is terminated. In the round feed process, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter. That is, the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly performed until the number of executed rounds reaches a predetermined number of times set in advance. In the round feed process, the first variable flag is turned off, and a wait time (interval time) until the next round is started is set for the first variable timer.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if the interval period is between rounds, the process proceeds to step S1209 to determine whether or not the value of the first variable timer is “0”. .

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, that is, when the interval period ends and the timing for starting the next round is reached, a round start process is performed in step S1210. In the round start process, the first variable flag is turned on, the opening time (“7500” in this example) of the variable winning device 32 per round is set for the first variable timer, and the winning counter is set. The maximum number of winnings per round (in this example, “8”) is set. If a negative determination is made in step S1209, or if the round start process is completed in step S1210, this process ends.

  Various control signals are output to the variable prize device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process based on the ON / OFF state of the first variable flag. When the first variable flag is on, a control signal for opening the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is output, and the variable winning device 32 is opened. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is OFF, a control signal for closing the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is output, and the variable winning device 32 is closed.

  Here, the end setting process in step S1207 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1301, the first variable flag is turned off. In the subsequent step S1302, the big hit medium flag is turned off. Thereafter, in step S1303, the time reduction mode flag is set to ON. That is, in the present embodiment, the time reduction mode is given after the jackpot state of all jackpot types of “direct hit jackpot”, “15 round jackpot”, “7 round jackpot”, and “three round jackpot”. It is configured as follows.

  After step S1303, the normal mode flag is turned off in step S1304. Thereafter, in step S1305, “4” is set in the variation counter, and the process proceeds to step S1306. That is, after the big hit, the time reduction mode is set until the variable display is performed four times. In step S1306, processing for turning off various jackpot flags is performed. After step S1306, this process ends.

  Next, the blade member opening / closing process in step S207 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the blade opening flag (see step S908 of the variation display setting process) is turned on. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, it is determined in step S1802 whether an open flag indicating that the blade member 404 is open is on. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, that is, if the blade member 404 is to be opened from now on by winning “small hit”, the process proceeds to step S1803.

  In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the value of the open / close control timer is “0”. As described above, when it is determined that the “small hit” is won in the variation display setting process, it corresponds to the same time as the variation time of the variation display performed in the special display device 43 for the open / close control timer. The value to be set is set (see Step S913, Step S916, Step S920, Step S923). For this reason, an affirmative determination is made in this determination simultaneously with the end of the corresponding variable display.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1803, the value of the open / close control timer is decremented by 1 in step S1804, and this process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, that is, when it is time to open the blade member 404, the open flag is turned on in step S1805, and the blade member 404 is opened in step S1806. The processing to be done.

  After that, in step S1807, it is determined whether or not the long small hit occurrence flag of the execution area of the special variation holding area is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1807, a value “375” corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set in the open / close control timer in step S1808. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1807, a value “125” corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the open / close control timer in step S1809. After step S1808 and step S1809, this process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, it is determined in step S1810 whether or not the value of the open / close control timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1810, the value of the open / close control timer is decremented by 1 in step S1811, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1810, that is, if it is time to close the blade member 404, the open flag is turned off in step S1812, and the blade open flag is turned off in step S1813. In step S1814, a process for closing the blade member 404 is performed, and then the present process is terminated.

  Next, the second display control process of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2101, whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is in a switching display (variable display) by looking at the setting state of the second display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing a variable display. Is determined. Specifically, when the second display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the normal symbol display device 41 varies. It is considered that the stop display corresponding to the display stop state is in progress.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the variable display is not being performed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc> 0, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step S2104, a process for shifting the data stored in the normal variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the normally variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area.

  Thereafter, in step S2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, the normal symbol display device 41 performs a process indicating that a condition for performing switching display (variable display) is established. Specifically, the second display timer flag is turned on, and the second display timer setting process is performed. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41, and is used when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, the time display mode 41 in the normal symbol display device 41 is different from the time reduction mode in the high pitching state and the normal mode in the normal display mode. A value “125” corresponding to 5 seconds is set, and in the normal mode, a value “2500” corresponding to 15 seconds is set for the second display timer. During the big hit state, “2500” is set for the second display timer as in the normal mode.

  Based on the setting in the start setting process, when a control signal for starting the switching display (variation display) is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output process of the normal process, the normal symbol display is performed. Switching display is started in the device 41. Then, after step S2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

  If the determination in step S2101 is affirmative, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process advances to step S2106 to perform a second display timer subtraction process. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by one.

  In step S2107, it is determined whether or not the count value of the second display timer is “0”, that is, whether or not the variation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the second display flag is turned off in step S2108, and normal symbol stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal to stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output processing in the normal processing.

  Note that, as described above, whether or not the winning is made is determined based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the normal variation holding area. Specifically, "1-8" is a winning value among the numerical values 0-9 of the normal symbol random number counter C3.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, a normal symbol discrimination information setting process is performed, and this process ends. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for opening / closing the start winning device 33 is performed. Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on, and the release time is set in the second variable timer.

  The second variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the second start winning device 33b (opening / closing member 33c) is in an open state.

  The second variable timer is means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second start winning device 33b, and is considered when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed since the opening start. In the present embodiment, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b (opening / closing member 33c) is different between the time reduction mode that is a high pitched state and the normal mode. In the time reduction mode, the second variable timer is used. On the other hand, a value “500” corresponding to 2 seconds is set, and in the normal mode, a value “100” corresponding to 0.4 seconds is set for the second variable timer. During the big hit state, “100” is set for the second variable timer as in the normal mode.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111 a switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variation display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this process is terminated. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to light up and display “O” or “−” as a normal symbol. If the current lighting is “O”, “−” and “−” are displayed. If so, display is switched to “○”. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  Next, the opportunity handling unit control processing in step S209 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not a second variable flag indicating whether or not the second start winning device 33b (opening / closing member 33c) is in an open state is ON. Here, when it is determined that the second variable flag is not on (the second start winning device 33b is in the closed state), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, that is, if the second variable flag is on, it is considered that the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, and a second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2203, and it is determined whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed by taking into account the value of the second variable timer after the subtraction. Here, when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S2203. If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204, and after an end setting process is performed in step S2204, this process ends. In the end setting process of step S2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

  Various control signals are output to the second start winning device 33b in the next external output process of the normal process based on the ON / OFF state of the second variable flag. When the second variable flag is on, a drive signal for opening the opening / closing member 33c is output to the second start winning device 33b (a solenoid for driving the second start winning device 33b), and the second start winning device 33b is opened. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is OFF, a drive signal for closing the opening / closing member 33c is output to the second start winning device 33b, and the second start winning device 33b is closed.

  Next, the remaining sphere monitoring process in step S210 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7101, it is determined whether or not the value of the pitching counter is “0”.

  The “entrance counter” is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the entrance count switch 437 as described above, and the non-special entry detection switch 462, 15R entrance detection switch 734, 3R early detection switch 753, and 1 is subtracted based on the detection of the 7R early detection switch 754. The “ball clogging counter” is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754, and is based on the detection of the 3R incoming detection switch 736 and the 7R incoming detection switch 735. 1 is subtracted. In other words, the entrance counter of the present embodiment is downstream of the entrance count switch 437 in the specific area 401, and from the 3R early detection switch 753, the 7R early detection switch 754, and the 15R entrance detection switch 734. Is also configured to count the number of game balls present in the upstream range.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7101, the value of the monitoring timer for determining whether or not the specified time has elapsed since the game ball last entered the specific area 401 in step S7102. Whether or not “0” is determined. In the present embodiment, when a ball enters the specific area 401, “10000” is set in the monitoring timer. Therefore, the monitoring timer becomes “0” 40 seconds after the last entry in the specific area 401. In the present embodiment, the time from when the game ball enters the specific area 401 until it is discharged, more specifically, after the game ball is detected by the entrance count switch 437, The time until detection by the special entry detection switch 462, 15R entry detection switch 734, 7R entry detection switch 735, or 3R entry detection switch 736 is approximately 8 to 30 seconds.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7102, the value of the monitoring timer is decremented by 1 in step S7103, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7102, that is, even if the time that is assumed as the time from when the game ball enters the specific area 401 to when it is discharged, the entry counter (or will be described later) If the value of the “ball clogging counter” is not “0” and it is considered that ball clogging has occurred in the specific area 401, error notification processing is performed in step S7104. Specifically, for example, control is performed such as turning on an error lamp, outputting an error notification sound, and prohibiting the launch of a game ball. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If the determination in step S7101 is affirmative, in step S7105, the number of game balls present in the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 provided in the specific area 401 (type lottery area 408) is specified. It is determined whether or not the value of the clogging counter is “0”. The “ball clogging counter” is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754 as described above, and the 3R incoming detection switch 736 and the 7R incoming detection switch. 1 is subtracted based on the detection of 735. That is, the ball clogging counter according to the present embodiment includes the 3R guide passage 743 on the downstream side of the 3R early detection switch 753 and the upstream side of the 3R incoming detection switch 736 in the specific region 401 and the 7R early detection switch 754. It is configured to count the number of game balls existing in the 7R guide passage 745 on the downstream side and on the upstream side of the 7R entrance detection switch 735.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S 7105, that is, if it is determined that no game ball remains in the specific area 401, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7105, the process proceeds to step S7102.

  Next, the preceding effect process in step S211 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7701, it is determined whether or not the 3R early detection flag indicating that the 3R early detection switch 753 has been detected is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7701, it is determined in step S7702 whether or not the value of the pitching counter is zero.

  If the determination in step S7702 is affirmative, that is, in the specific area 401, although the ball has not yet entered the out passage 428, 15R entrance 731, 3R guide passage 743, and 7R guide passage 745, If there is no game ball that can be played, whether or not the value of the ball clogging counter is 1 in step S7703, that is, the specific area 401 is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 now. It is determined whether or not there is only a game ball. If a negative determination is made in step S7703, that is, if there is a game ball in the specific area 401 other than the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 (downstream of the 3R early detection switch 753 in the specific area 401). 2 and more game balls in the region upstream of the 3R entrance detection switch 736 and in the region downstream of the 7R early detection switch 754 and upstream of the 7R entrance detection switch 735 When there is an error state in which it is determined that there is no game ball in the specific area 401 even though it exists or the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 exists in the specific area 401 ), The process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that there is no game ball in the specific area 401, error processing may be performed.

  The time required for the 3R early detection switch 753 to detect the game ball from the 3R early detection switch 753 is approximately 8 seconds, and the game ball is detected by the 7R early detection switch 754. The time required for the 7R entry detection switch 735 to be detected is approximately 4 seconds.

  In addition, the time required from when the game ball is detected by the entrance count switch 437 to when it is detected by the 15R entrance detection switch 734 is approximately 17 seconds to 22 seconds, and the game ball is input to the entrance count switch 437. The time required from detection to the 7R entry detection switch 735 is approximately 22 seconds to 26 seconds. After the game ball is detected by the entry count switch 437, the 3R entry detection switch 736 is detected. The time required for detection is approximately 26 seconds to 30 seconds.

  That is, at the time when the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected, if there is no game ball in the specific area 401, the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736. There is no possibility that another game ball will be detected by the 15R entrance detection switch 734 or the 7R entrance detection switch 735 before the start.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7703, that is, if there is only one game ball present in the specific area 401 detected by the 3R early detection switch 753, in step S7704, the sub-control device 262 is A process of setting a 3R preceding opening command for deriving an opening effect corresponding to “3 round jackpot” prior to the start of the jackpot state is performed.

  In other words, in this embodiment, when another game ball does not exist in the specific area 401 when the game ball enters the 3R guide passage 743, the occurrence of the big hit of three rounds is ensured. It takes about 8 seconds from the detection by the 3R early detection switch 753 to the detection by the 3R entrance detection switch 736 (in addition, the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 are relatively invisible due to the covering cover 756). ing). For this reason, the player may have a sense of incongruity that the jackpot state is not easily started even though the occurrence of the jackpot state for three rounds is ensured. In view of this, in step S7704, when the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected, an opening effect that announces the start of the big hit state is derived, thereby eliminating such a concern.

  The jackpot state is an opening period that teaches the start of the jackpot state and a period in which the variable winning device 32 is opened. The variable winning device 32 is set between a round period that is set a plurality of times and the round period. There are an interval period that is a period in which the closed state is set and an ending period that teaches the end of the jackpot state, and an opening effect is performed in the opening period.

  The sub-control device 262 that has received the 3R preceding opening command performs a process for deriving the opening effect corresponding to “3 rounds jackpot”, but does not start the 3 rounds jackpot state. It only derives an effect for teaching the start of the state (no meaning of the opening period, in that respect, a pseudo opening effect). The 3-round jackpot state is started when a game ball is detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736.

An opening effect derived based on reception of the 3R preceding opening command (hereinafter referred to as “preceding opening effect”) is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 and then detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736. The time until the big hit state is started is connected, and the derivation time is not constant (because it depends on the moving speed of the game ball). That is, the estimated time from when the game ball is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 to when the game ball is detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736 is about 8 seconds. On the other hand, the preceding opening effect corresponding to the 3R jackpot is derived from a series of effect modes (moving image; almost the same as the opening effect in this example) in the first half (for example, 0 to 7 seconds) (For example, after 7 seconds) An effect mode (which may be a still image) in which a short effect mode (moving image) is repeatedly derived is derived so as to be connected to the effect of the subsequent round period at any time without interruption. The
But is also possible).

  Furthermore, for the 3 round jackpot and the 7 round jackpot, a normal pattern (first opening pattern) in which an opening period is provided and a shortened pattern (second opening pattern) in which the opening period is omitted are set. . In the present embodiment, the shortened pattern is selected when the preceding opening effect is derived. For example, the first opening pattern for 3 round jackpots and 7 round jackpots is set to “7 seconds”, and a series of moving images is derived. The second opening pattern for 3 round jackpots is set to “0 seconds”. The second opening pattern of 7 rounds jackpot is set to “3 seconds”, and a loop moving image following the opening effect derived based on reception of a 7R preceding opening command described later is derived.

  After step S7704, after the 3R early detection flag is turned off in step S7705, the present process is terminated.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S7702, that is, in the specific area 401, a game that has not yet entered any of the out passage 428, the 15R entrance 731, the 3R guide passage 743, and the 7R guide passage 745. If there is a ball (there is a game ball that may soon enter any of the 15R entrance 731, 3R guide passage 743, and 7R guide passage 745), in step S7706, For the control device 262, a promotion reception display command for deriving a promotion reception display meaning “3R jackpot will be generated, but may be changed to a more advantageous jackpot” Set.

  That is, for example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area 408, the preceding game ball enters the 3R guide passage 743, and the subsequent game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746, the preceding game ball Since the subsequent game ball may be detected by the 15R entrance detection switch 734 before the 3R entrance detection switch 736 is detected, when the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected. Promotion reception display indicating that the promotion is accepting that there is a possibility that a better jackpot will be generated rather than performing the opening opening effect that 3R jackpot will occur. Is going to be derived.

  As a result, when the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected, an effect can be provided on the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like. After the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected, a predetermined round entry detection switch is obtained. Until the detection of 734, 735, and 736 is performed, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a relatively long time lag occurs without any reaction corresponding to the detection of the 3R early detection switch 753. After step S7706, in step S7705, the 3R early detection flag is turned off, and then the process ends. In this embodiment, the function of deriving the promotion reception display to the decorative symbol display device 42 constitutes the promotion reception state teaching means. Further, the function of deriving the promotion reception display and the preceding opening effect constitutes the early teaching means.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7701, it is determined in step S7707 whether or not the 7R early detection flag is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S7707, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7707, it is determined in step S7708 whether or not the value of the pitching counter is zero. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7708, it is determined in step S7709 whether or not the value of the ball clogging counter is 1. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7709, that is, if there is only one game ball present in the specific area 401 detected by the 7R early detection switch 754, in step S7710, the sub-control device 262 is A process of setting a 7R preceding opening command for deriving an opening effect corresponding to “7 round jackpot” prior to the start of the jackpot state is performed. After step S7710, after the 7R early detection flag is turned off in step S7711, the present process is terminated.

  Note that the opening effect derived based on the reception of the 7R preceding opening command is detected by the 7R early detection switch 754 and then detected by the 7R entrance detection switch 735 until the big hit state is started. The derivation time is not constant (because it depends on the moving speed of the game ball). That is, the estimated time from when the game ball is detected by the 7R early detection switch 754 to when the game ball is detected by the 7R entrance detection switch 735 is about 5 seconds. On the other hand, the preceding opening effect corresponding to the 7R jackpot is derived from a series of effect modes (video; almost the same as the opening effect in this example) in the first half (for example, 0 second to 4 seconds), and the second half (For example, after 4 seconds) An effect mode (which may be a still image) in which a short effect mode (moving image) is repeatedly derived is derived so as to be connected to the effect of the subsequent round period when it is interrupted at any time. The

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S7709, that is, when there is a game ball in the specific area 401 other than the game ball detected by the 7R early detection switch 754 (in the specific area 401, the 3R early detection switch 753 2 in the region upstream of the 3R entrance detection switch 736 and downstream of the 7R early detection switch 754 and upstream of the 7R entrance detection switch 735. There is an error state in which it is determined that there is no game ball in the specific area 401 even though there are two or more game balls detected by the 7R early detection switch 754. Step S7710, skip to step S7711 and turn off the 7R early detection flag. To end the. If it is determined that there is no game ball in the specific area 401, error processing may be performed.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S7708, in step S7712, the sub-control device 262 is told, “A 7R jackpot will be generated, but it may be changed to a more advantageous jackpot.” The promotion reception display command for deriving the promotion reception display having the meaning as described above is set. Thereafter, after the 7R early detection flag is turned off in step S7711, the present process is terminated.

  Note that the processing of step S7702, step S7703, step S7708, and step S7709 constitutes the indeterminate element determination processing, and is based on the processing of setting the preceding opening command in steps S7704 and S7710 and the reception of the preceding opening command. The process of deriving the preceding opening effect constitutes the preceding opening process.

  Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 33, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interruption when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily waited, and the reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 in step S3001 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and ends this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, as illustrated in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command is received. If a command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by confirming a port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

  Next, main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311. This main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S3101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. In step S3103, the RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

  Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513. It should be noted that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

  If no power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit interruption.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal in step S3108, the process at the time of power recovery (at the time of power failure recovery) Process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, power-off occurrence information is cleared in step S3110, and a payout permission flag that permits payout of prize balls is cleared in step S3111. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized. In step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. In step S3114, an interrupt is permitted.

  After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on occurrence of power supply interruption is set, the power supply is cut off. Therefore, the processing after step S3123 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power supply interruption. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and a command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. Thereafter, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to calculate the backup area 513a. In step S3128, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 513.

  Note that since the process of step S3122 confirms the occurrence information of the power-off after the process performed at the time of turning on the power, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than that in the middle of each process. Less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, the timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S3201, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed.

  Here, the command determination processing in step S3201 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not a command reception flag is turned on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is OFF, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing of step S3304 to step S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command. In step S3305, it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command. In step S3306, it is determined whether the command is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag has already been turned on. If the payout permission flag has been turned off, the main power is turned on. Since the initialization of the RAM 513 is instructed from the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission for the winning ball is set.

  As described above, the main controller 261 performs initialization processing of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes processing of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially at the same time. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to a shift in the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. The occurrence of adverse effects can be prevented. In addition, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set the payout allowance for prize balls.

  On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and the initialization process of the RAM 513. That is, the processing in step S3307 prohibits initialization of the RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. The payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. Therefore, the payout initialization command is not received in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized the payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S3309) is executed in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on, the payout is not made when a prize ball remains. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cut-off. In order to permit the payout of the prize ball, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on occurrence of power interruption and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power interruption, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Further, if the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number and stored in step S3310. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since a prize ball corresponding to the number of prize balls is paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the prize ball to be paid out. . In addition, when a winning ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the winning ball can be paid out early for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Note that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is not a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), is not a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and is not a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is terminated without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Returning to the flowchart of FIG. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is ended as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent award balls from being paid out before a command is transmitted from the main controller 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204, and the state return operation is determined to be started. Perform a return operation. With this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, when the payout motor is clogged, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state). .

  Thereafter, in step S3205, setting of the lower plate full state or the lower plate full release state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. In other words, the lower plate 15 full state is determined based on the detection signal of the lower plate full switch. When the lower plate is full, the lower plate full state is set, and when the lower plate is not full, the lower plate full is released. Perform state setting. In step S3206, setting of a tank ball absence state (out of ball state) or a tank ball absence release state (ball state) is executed in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and the special setting for the absence of the tank ball and the setting for the no tank ball state are executed. Perform configuration.

  Thereafter, in step S3207, for example, the presence / absence of a state to be notified, such as an error state, is determined. If there is a state to be notified, a notification is made.

  Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

  In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked to execute the ball removal process by driving the payout motor 358a on the condition that the ball removal disabled state is not set and the ball removal operation is not started. In a succeeding step S3212, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

  Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  In the subsequent step S3903, a hold information storage process for storing the fluctuation information included in the advance command in the hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553 is performed. The starting command includes, as described above, information indicating whether or not the display is a variable display triggered by the first start winning device 33a (setting of the first start winning flag), and variable information corresponding to the jackpot. Information indicating whether there is a jackpot occurrence flag setting, information indicating whether it is a variable display corresponding to a long jackpot or short jackpot (setting of a long jackpot occurrence flag or a short jackpot occurrence flag), corresponding to a deviation Information indicating whether or not the change display is to be performed (setting of the out flag), information indicating the change time of the change display (setting of the 2 second change flag, 3 second change flag, 7 second change flag, 0.1 second flag) Is included.

  Further, the holding information storage area includes four holding areas (holding first to fourth holding areas) and one execution area, like the special variable holding area of the main control device 261. In the hold information storage area, the change information included in the advance command is stored in time series in accordance with the reception history of the advance command based on the change display (information stored in the special change hold area). By adopting this configuration, the sub-control device 262 can also grasp the fluctuation information stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the main control device 261.

  Here, the hold information storage processing in step S3903 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not a starting command has been received (whether or not the starting command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, in step S4102, a hold counter Np that counts the number of variable information held in the hold information storage area is incremented by one.

  In the following step S4103, fluctuation information including information on whether or not big hit, information on whether or not small hit, fluctuation time information, etc. included in the advance command is stored in the first reserved area in the reserved information storage area. Remember in the area. Thereafter, in step S4104, the values of various counters used in determining the effect display content are acquired, and the values are stored in the same holding area where the variation information is stored.

  After performing the process of step S4104 or when a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process proceeds to step S4105 to determine whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (whether or not the variation pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). Or not). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4105, 1 is subtracted from the value of the hold counter Np in step S4106.

  After step S4106, in step S4107, processing for shifting the data stored in the hold information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data (including flag information) stored in the first to fourth reservation areas of the reservation information storage area to the execution area side. The first reservation area → the execution area The data in each area is shifted, for example, second reserved area → first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area.

  After performing the process of step S4107, or when a negative determination is made in step S4205, the present process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 37, after step S3903 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed since the start. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3905. If the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step S3911.

  In step S3905, update processing of various counters used when determining the effect display content is executed. In subsequent step S3906, display setting processing is performed. Here, various arithmetic processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are basically performed based on information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 when a variation pattern command is received. Accordingly, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined here, and a value corresponding to the variation time of the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer. At this time, the sub-control device 262 performs processing based on a table associating various types of effects (variation types) with variation pattern commands.

  In step S3906, the presence / absence of the operation of the effect button 125 is also checked. If the operation of the effect button 125 is confirmed, settings corresponding to the operation are performed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when “100” is set in the variation counter in the end setting process, or when the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 in the discrimination information setting process, a command including that is the main command. It is output from the control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and the sub-control device 262 is configured to display the remaining number of times on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the command information.

  The display command is, for example, a command for designating a series of display effects from the start to the end of variable display, or a command for designating a display effect during a jackpot, and is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. A necessary display command is generated each time based on the above. Usually, the display commands related to the variable display generated by the sub-control device 262 are roughly divided into a normal variable data group, a reach effect data group, and the like. Basically, each data constituting these data groups is the variable time timer. Are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time order, thereby providing display effects according to various variation patterns. For example, the normal fluctuation data group includes normal fluctuation data 1, normal fluctuation data 2,..., And normal fluctuation data m, and the reach effect data group includes reach effect data 1, reach effect data 2,. In the case of n, data output is sequentially performed in the order of normal fluctuation data 1 → 2 →... → m with the start of normal fluctuation, and subsequently reach effect data 1 → 2 → with the start of reach effect. ... → Data is sequentially output in the order of n.

  Note that the display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts a variable display of symbols on the decorative symbol display device. Once the variation pattern command is received from main controller 261, sub-control is performed until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (until the variation time timer set in step S3906 becomes 0). The effect display is continued under the cooperation of the device 262 and the display control device 45.

  In the lamp setting process of step S3907, the lighting pattern of the lamp / electrical accessories is set so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In the sound setting process of step S3908, the output pattern of the speaker 24 is set to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, when a voice-related command such as notification of an error occurrence is transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step S3908.

  In step S3909, a demonstration that is set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses in a state where the display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43 is not performed in the decorative symbol display device 42, for example, in the customer design. Perform other processing such as control settings for (screen display).

  In step 3910, external output processing for transmitting a control signal based on the setting contents in steps S3905 to 3909 to each device is executed. For example, the display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative design display device 42 performs a display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43.

  After the processing of steps S3905 to S3910 performed every 1 msec is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3911, and whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 553 is determined. Is determined. The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from the main controller 261.

  If no power off occurrence information is stored, the process advances to step S3912 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3911 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3913. In power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

  As described above in detail, according to the present embodiment, the central winning unit 37 includes the normal path 701 for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific area 401 to the most upstream portion of the winning / failing lottery area 407, and the specific area 401. There is a special passage 702 that guides the game balls that entered the ball to the midstream part of the pass / fail lottery area 407. The slide unit 721 determines whether or not the game balls that have passed through the special passage 702 are dropped into the out passage 428. Can be avoided. For this reason, the special passage 702 has a higher possibility that a game ball that has entered the specific area 401 will reach the rotating body 414 than the normal passage 701, and thus enters the special pocket portion 416a. This is a passage that has a high possibility of reaching the safe passage 427 in which the entrance detection switch 461 is installed (the expectation degree of jackpot is high).

  Further, a branch point between a normal guide unit 704 that guides a game ball that has entered the specific area 401 to the normal passage 701 and a special guide unit 705 that guides the game ball that has entered the specific area 401 to the special passage 702. , A route distribution device 703 is provided. The route distribution device 703 of the present embodiment has a shaft portion 713 that is pivotally supported around a shaft pin 711 extending in the front-rear direction, and a left-hand side from the shaft portion 713 in a reference posture in an equilibrium state. A first wing portion 714 protruding toward the right side and a second wing portion 715 protruding toward the right side from the shaft portion 713 are provided.

  When the game balls are guided to the route distribution device 703 one by one and the game balls fall on the first wing portion 714 or the second wing portion 715, the route distribution device 703 is weighted by the weight of the game balls. Rotates to the left or right. The guide surfaces 714a and 715a (upper surface) of the first wing part 714 or the second wing part 715 of the route distribution device 703 that is in the rotating posture in this way are configured to communicate with the normal guide part 704, The game ball that has fallen on the first wing 714 or the second wing 715 is guided by the normal guide 704, and by the normal passage 701.

  On the other hand, a pair of left and right introduction passages 718 (a pair of left and right introduction passages 718 (the first entrance opening 403a and the second entrance opening 403b) enter the entrance passages 718 ( Two game balls are simultaneously guided to the route distribution device 703 from the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b), and the two game balls fall simultaneously on the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715. In this case, since the weight on the first wing portion 714 side and the weight on the second wing portion 715 side are balanced, the reference posture of the route distribution device 703 is maintained. The guide surfaces 714a and 715a (upper surface) of the first wing part 714 or the second wing part 715 of the route distribution device 703 in the reference posture are configured to communicate with the pair of left and right special guide parts 705, respectively. Both the game balls that have fallen on the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 are guided to the special guide portion 705 and eventually to the special passage 702.

  This makes it possible to match a plurality of game balls to enter the specific area 401 and to increase the expectation of entering the special pocket portion 416a. For this reason, since a plurality of game balls are entered together in the specific area 401, the player's expectation that it will work advantageously for entering the game balls into the special pocket portion 416a, and actually It can be matched with the fact that a plurality of game balls are guided to the special passage 702 to increase the expectation of entering the special pocket portion 416a. Therefore, even if a plurality of game balls are made to enter the specific area 401 together, it is possible to avoid a situation where the expected value of jackpot is not contributed to, or rather, is reduced. It is possible to derive a behavior of the game ball that meets the player's expectation that the jackpot expectation is improved by entering the game balls together.

  Further, for example, in the route distribution device 703, it is possible to prevent problems that occur based on the deterioration of the elastic body, compared to the case where an elastic body such as a spring or rubber is used. Furthermore, there is no need to provide a driving means for driving the route distribution device 703, and the configuration and control can be simplified and downsized. In addition, compared to a configuration in which the route is switched depending on whether or not there are a plurality of game balls by using a switch and a driving means for detecting the game ball, there is a doubt that the player may feel distrust. Can be reduced, and fairness can be appealed.

  Furthermore, a pair of entrance openings 403 (a first entrance opening 403a and a second entrance opening 403b) are provided, and game balls that enter the specific area via the first entrance opening 403a are provided. A game ball that has entered the specific area 401 through the first introduction passage 718a that is guided to the first wing portion 714 (dropped to the guide surface 714a of the first wing portion 714) and the second entrance opening 403b. A second introduction passage 718b is provided that guides the second wing portion 715 (drops it onto the guide surface 715a of the second wing portion 715). Thereby, the opportunity to make a game ball contact simultaneously with the 1st wing | blade part 714 and the 2nd wing | blade part 715 can be increased, or the position where a game ball is dropped can be set to a suitable position. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the chance that all of the plurality of game balls entering the specific area 401 are guided to the special passage 702. In addition, it is possible to impart a game property such that a game ball is launched into both the left and right entrance openings 403a and 403b (to aim and desire) to be launched.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 is detected by the special ball detection switch 461 through the safe passage 427, and then outside the game area (specific area 401). Instead of being discharged, the type lottery area 408 which is a part of the specific area 401 is entered. Then, a big hit state such as which of the 15R entrance 731, 7R entrance 732, and 3R entrance 733 provided in the type lottery area 408 the game ball that entered the type lottery area 408 enters An analog lottery (type lottery) is performed to determine the type. For this reason, when game balls successively enter the two special pocket portions 416a of the rotating body 414, the big hit state to be given is detected by the special ball detection switch 461 first among the game balls that have passed continuously. Although it is for one time corresponding to the played game balls, all of the plurality of game balls that have entered the special ball detection switch 461 almost continuously can be utilized for the subsequent type lottery.

  Furthermore, the time from when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 until it is detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736 that triggers the occurrence of “3 round jackpot”, the game ball enters the type lottery area 408. It is configured to be longer than the time until it is detected by the 7R entrance detection switch 735 that triggers the occurrence of “7 round jackpot”. In addition, the time from when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 until it is detected by the 7R ball detection switch 735 that triggers the occurrence of “7 round jackpot”, the game ball enters the type lottery area 408. After that, it is configured to be longer than the time until it is detected by the 15R entrance detection switch 734, which is a trigger for the occurrence of “15 round big hit”.

  For this reason, for example, among the plurality of game balls continuously (standing) in the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414, the preceding game ball faces the 3R entrance 733 (3R entry detection switch 736). Even if the subsequent game ball goes to the 15R entrance 731 (15R entrance detection switch 734), the subsequent game ball enters the 15R entrance 731 first (to the 15R entrance detection switch 734). Detection), and a big hit of 15 rounds more advantageous to the player can be generated. Therefore, the subsequent game balls can be utilized more reliably. As a result, it is possible to suppress feelings such as a player's loss and wastefulness for a game ball continuously entering the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414, and also to suppress a decrease in interest caused by it. Can do.

  Also, in the type lottery area 408, a 3R guide passage 743 that leads the game ball to the 3R entrance 733, a 7R guide passage 745 that leads the game ball to the 7R entrance 732, and 15R enters the game ball. A 15R guide passage 746 that leads to the ball opening 731 is provided. Furthermore, the 3R guide passage 743 is divided by the first transfer plate 744 and the first transfer plate 744 that distribute the game balls that have entered the type lottery area 408 to the 3R guide passage 743 or the other guide passages 745 and 746. A second transfer plate 747 that distributes the game balls that have not been distributed to either the 7R guide passage 745 or the 15R guide passage 746 is provided. That is, the entrance of the 3R guide passage 743 is arranged on the upstream side of the moving path of the game ball in the type lottery area 408 than the entrance of the 7R guide passage 745, but the 3R guide passage 743 is guided by the 7R guide. The time required for the game ball to pass is longer than the passage 745 (in the above example, the travel distance of the game ball is long). Furthermore, although the entrance of the 7R guide passage 745 is arranged on the upstream side of the moving path of the game ball in the type lottery area 408 than the entrance of the 15R guide passage 746, the 7R guide passage 745 is provided with the 15R guide. The time required for the game ball to pass is longer than that of the passage 746.

  Therefore, in the case where the game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408 is not guided to the 3R guide passage 743 by the first transfer plate 744 (it has not been dropped by the “sieving” corresponding to the 3R guide passage 743), When the game ball is guided to the second transfer plate 747 and is not guided to the 7R guide passage 745 by the second transfer plate 747 (it was not dropped by the “sieving” corresponding to the 7R guide passage 745), A game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746. In other words, among the 3R guide passage 743, the 7R entrance 732, and the 15R guide passage 746, the entrance that is expected to generate a jackpot state that is more advantageous to the player is located at the downstream in the type lottery area 408. By being arranged on the side (the one that remains until the end has a better result), the excitement in the game can be expected. In particular, in the present embodiment, in the type lottery area 408, since the game balls are distributed in two stages, such operational effects are more remarkably exhibited.

  In addition, among the 3R guide passage 743, the 7R guide passage 745, and the 15R guide passage 746, the entrance that is expected to generate a jackpot state that is more advantageous to the player has the entrance of the type lottery area. In the case of adopting a configuration in which the game ball is arranged on the downstream side of 408, for example, when two game balls enter the two-type lottery area 408 in succession, the preceding game ball is transferred to the first delivery plate 744 and the second delivery. Even if the board 747 is guided to the 15R guide path 746 side, if the subsequent game ball is guided to the 3R guide path 743 side by the first transfer board 744, the subsequent game ball is guided earlier by 3R. The passage 743 is reached.

  In this regard, according to the present embodiment, the 3R guide passage 743 takes a longer time for the game ball to pass than the 7R guide passage 745, and the 7R guide passage 745 has a game ball more than the 15R guide passage 746. The time required for passage is increased. For this reason, for example, even if the preceding game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746 (7R guide passage 745), the subsequent game ball is guided to the 3R guide passage 743 or 7R guide passage 745 (3R guide passage 745). 743) and the preceding game ball enters the 15R guide passage 746 (7R guide passage 745) before the subsequent game ball enters the 3R guide passage 743 or 7R guide passage 745 (3R guide passage 743). It is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which the player has entered the ball and a 3 round jackpot or 7 round jackpot (3 round jackpot) occurs.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when two game balls enter the specific area 401 almost simultaneously, such as when the game balls enter the pair of left and right entrance openings 403 at the same time, these game balls Are easily guided to the special passage 702, and consequently, the possibility that a plurality of game balls continuously enter the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 is increased. For this reason, in such a configuration, the special pocket portion 416a (and thus the type lottery area 408) is adopted by adopting the above configuration in which it is not wasted that a plurality of game balls continuously enter the special pocket portion 416a. Even if a plurality of game balls enter consecutively, it is more effective to suppress the lowering of interest due to waste or loss.

  Further, a 3R early detection switch 753 for detecting a game ball moving through the 3R guide passage 743 and a 7R early detection switch 754 for detecting a game ball moving through the 7R guide passage 745 are provided, and the 3R early detection switch 753 or When the 7R early detection switch 754 is detected, the 3R early detection switch 753, the 7R early detection switch 754, and the 15R incoming ball in the specific region 401 downstream of the incoming ball count switch 437. A determination is made as to whether or not a game ball is present in an area upstream of the detection switch 734 (determination as to whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is “0”) (see the preceding effect process in FIG. 32). Here, if it is determined that there is no game ball in such a region, the region further downstream of the 3R early detection switch 753 and upstream of the 3R entrance detection switch in the specific region 401. And whether or not the number of game balls existing in the area downstream of the 7R early detection switch 754 and upstream of the 7R entrance detection switch is one (the value of the ball clogging counter is 1 is determined). Here, when it is determined that there is one, that is, it is determined that the number of game balls existing in the specific area 401 is only one detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754. In such a case, it is configured to derive a preceding opening effect imitating the opening effect that teaches the start of the big hit state.

  That is, the game balls that have entered the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 are confirmed to enter the 3R entrance 733 or the 7R entrance 732, but the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 are entered. Is configured such that the transit time of the game ball is longer than that of the 15R guide passage 746, so that the 3R entrance 733 or 7R entrance after the game ball enters the 3R guide passage 743 or 7R guide passage 745 It is conceivable that a relatively long time lag occurs until the player enters the ball 732 (until the ball is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 or the 7R ball entry detection switch 735). In this case, for example, when a game ball enters the special pocket portion 416a in a single shot and further enters the 3R guide passage 743 or the 7R guide passage 745, a corresponding 3R jackpot or 7R jackpot occurs at this point. Despite the fact that it is decided (as a player, it is not 15R big hit and it may be a little disappointed), it is relatively long until the game ball passes through the 3R guide passage 743 or 7R guide passage 745 It can be considered that it takes time, and it is difficult to start the big hit state.

  In this regard, when a game ball is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754 installed in the 3R guide passage 743 or the 7R guide passage 745, the game ball is detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736 or There is a possibility that another game ball may be detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736, the 7R entrance detection switch 735, or the 15R entrance detection switch 734 before being detected by the 7R entrance detection switch 735. If it is not in the state, the preceding opening effect indicating the occurrence of the 3R jackpot or the 7R jackpot is derived at that time, so that such a concern can be eliminated. Therefore, it takes too much time (without any reaction) until the jackpot state is started after the type of jackpot state is determined to be 3R jackpot or 7R jackpot, and the tempo of the game is poor. Therefore, it is possible to prevent such a situation that the interest is lowered.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when it is determined that only the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754 exists in the specific area 401, the preceding opening effect for 3 rounds big hit, Or it is comprised so that the prior | preceding opening effect for 7 rounds jackpots may be derived | led-out. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation in which there is a contradiction between the mode of the preceding opening effect and the type of the jackpot state that actually occurs, while being configured to be able to teach the type of the jackpot state in the preceding opening effect. . In addition, it is possible to improve the stage performance and give the player a sense of security by configuring the type of the big hit state so that it can be taught in the preceding opening stage.

  Furthermore, in the big hit state, there are a normal pattern and a shortened pattern in which the opening period is omitted, and when the pre-opening effect is derived when setting the big hit state, the shortened pattern is selected. Has been. Thereby, when the preceding opening effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the opening effect from becoming too long by performing the opening effect having a normal length. Accordingly, it is possible to more reliably avoid problems such as a deterioration in game tempo.

  In addition, the value is added based on the detection of the entrance count switch 437, and the non-special entry detection switch 462, the 3R early detection switch 753, the 7R early detection switch 754, and the 15R entrance detection switch 734 are detected. And a value added based on the detection of the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754 and the 3R entrance detection switch 736 and 7R entrance A clogging counter with a value subtracted based on detection by the detection switch 735 is provided. As a result, the number of game balls existing in the specific area 401 can be grasped, and it is determined whether or not a ball clogging has occurred. In the specific area 401, the 3R early detection switch 753 or 7R early detection is performed. In addition to the game ball detected by the switch 754, it can be determined whether or not there is a game ball. Therefore, it is possible to perform error processing due to ball clogging, improve the accuracy of the preceding opening effect, increase the amount of information of the preceding opening effect, and improve the game performance and performance. .

  Further, when the detection of the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754 is performed, it is determined whether or not the value of the entrance counter is 0, and when it is determined that the value is not 0, the big hit state A promotion reception display indicating that the type is a promotion reception state for which the type has not yet been determined is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. For this reason, for example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area 408 and the preceding game ball enters the 3R guide passage 743, it is still determined that a big hit state of three rounds of big hit will occur. Unless the subsequent game ball enters the 3R guide path 743, the player is surely recognized that there is a possibility that a big hit state of 7 rounds or 15 rounds will be generated. be able to. Therefore, the gameability can be understood more reliably, and when the situation as in the above example occurs, the behavior of the following game ball and the game ball entering the type lottery area 408 continuously. You can have a stronger interest in

  In addition, in this embodiment, the detection of the first entrance count switch 437a provided in the first introduction passage 718a and the detection of the second entrance count switch 437b provided in the second introduction passage 718b are performed simultaneously. It is configured to derive different effects depending on whether it is performed or performed independently. Therefore, the player can recognize and enjoy the moment that the player is happy that two game balls are simultaneously guided to the first wing 714 and the second wing 715 of the route distribution device 703.

  Further, in this embodiment, the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 are disposed so as to cover the front (a translucent material that reduces the visibility of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745). ) A covering cover 756 (see FIG. 4) is provided as a covering means. Thereby, the visibility of the game ball changes before and after the game ball enters the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745. For this reason, the entrance of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 can be regarded as the entrance of the 3R entrance 731 and the 7R entrance 732. Therefore, basically, it is easier to understand the premise of the game that a big hit state of “3R big hit” or “7R big hit” occurs when entering the entrance of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745. can do. In addition, by visually recognizing the 3R guide path 743 and the 7R guide path 745 shaped to delay the game ball, it is possible to prevent the designability from being deteriorated and the type lottery area 408 from being complicated. Can do.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (A) In the above embodiment, the configuration of the route distribution device 703 that distributes the game balls that have entered the specific area 401 to the normal passage 701 (normal guide portion 704) or the special passage 702 (special guide portion 705) It is not limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the reference posture of the route distribution device 703 is a posture capable of guiding the game ball to the special passage 702, and the reference posture is maintained when guiding the game ball. Is guided to the special passage 702, but the reference posture of the route distribution device 703 is a posture capable of guiding the game ball to the normal passage 701, and guides the game ball (in contact with the game ball). The game ball may be guided to the special passage 702 by changing the posture of the game ball to the special passage 702. Next, a mode example of the route distribution device will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG.

  (A-1) A route distribution device 901 shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 includes a base plate 902 attached to the front side of the game board 30 and a distribution plate 903 provided to be rotatable with respect to the base plate 902. I have. The distribution plate 903 includes a substantially cylindrical bearing portion 904 extending in the left-right direction, a plate-shaped front piece portion 905 protruding forward from the bearing portion 904, and a plate-shaped rear piece portion 906 protruding backward from the bearing portion 904. And. A cylindrical shaft pin 907 is inserted into the bearing portion 904, and both end portions of the shaft pin 907 are configured to be attached to the base plate 902. Thus, the distribution plate 903 is attached to the base plate 902 so as to be rotatable.

  As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, the shaft pin 907 and the bearing portion 904 extend in the horizontal direction, whereas the upper surface of the distribution plate 903 (front piece portion 905) is inclined slightly downward toward the left. And extended. As shown in FIG. 43, the rear piece 906 of the distribution plate 903 is provided with a weight portion 911, and the portion of the distribution plate 903 from the bearing portion 904 is more forward than the portion of the front side of the bearing portion 904. The rear part is also heavier. The weight portion 911 may be formed integrally with the rear piece portion 906, or a weight portion 911 which is a separate member may be attached to the rear piece portion 906.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 43, a lower stopper 912 is provided that contacts and supports the lower surface of the sorting plate 903 in a posture in which there is no inclination in the front-rear direction. In a state where an external force such as a game ball is in contact with the distribution plate 903 is not applied, the distribution plate 903 is maintained in a posture in which there is no inclination in the front-rear direction (hereinafter referred to as “reference posture”). It has become.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 44, a game that has entered the central winning unit 37 (the route distribution area 406 of the specific area 401) from each ball opening opening 403 is on the upper right side of the distribution board 903 (front piece 905). An outlet 921 of the introduction passage 718 for guiding the sphere is formed. In this embodiment, the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b merge to form a common outlet 921.

  Further, a game ball discharged from the introduction passage 718 is received at a position directly below the outlet 921 of the introduction passage 718 and guided to the upper right end portion (the most upstream portion) of the distribution plate 903 (front piece portion 905). A receiving plate 922 is provided.

  Further, a normal guide portion 704 for guiding the game ball to the normal passage 701 is provided on the left side of the distribution plate 903 (front piece portion 905), and a game is provided below the distribution plate 903 (front piece portion 905). A special guide unit 705 for guiding the ball to the special passage 702 is provided. Usually, the distribution plate 903 is in the reference posture, and the special guide portion 705 is closed by the distribution plate 903.

  When the game ball enters the central winning unit 37 (the route distribution area 406 of the specific area 401), the game ball passes through the introduction passage 718 and passes through the receiving plate 922 in front of the distribution board 903. Guided to the right side of the upper surface of the piece 905. In this example, the weight of the front piece 905 of the distribution board 903 and the weight of one game ball is added to the weight of the rear piece 906 of the distribution board 903 and the weight of the weight 911. It is configured to be lighter than the combined weight.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), even if one game ball is placed on the upper surface of the front piece 905, the distribution board 903 is maintained in the reference posture, and the game ball has the front piece 905. As a result, the normal guidance unit 704 is guided.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), when two or more game balls are placed on the upper surface of the front piece 905, the sorting plate 903 is moved from the reference posture and the front piece 905 is directed forward. It is comprised so that rotation displacement may be carried out to the rotation attitude | position which inclines below. That is, in this embodiment, the weight of the front piece 905 of the distribution board 903 and the weight of two game balls is the weight of the rear piece 906 of the distribution board 903 and the weight 911. It is configured to be heavier than the total weight of

  As indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 43, the special guide portion 705 is opened when the distribution plate 903 is displaced to the turning posture. Therefore, when two or more game balls are placed on the upper surface of the front piece portion 905, the game balls placed on the upper surface of the front piece portion 905 are guided to the special guide portion 705. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the route distribution device 901 has an upper stopper 913 that contacts and supports the upper surface of the rear piece 906 of the distribution plate 903 that has been displaced to the rotational position on the rear surface side of the base plate 902. I have. The distribution plate 903 in contact with the upper stopper 913 is maintained in a posture in which the upper surface of the distribution plate 903 is inclined downward toward the front. Thereby, after the game ball placed on the upper surface of the front piece 905 moves to the special guide portion 705, the distribution plate 903 is configured to be rotationally displaced to the reference position by the balance of its own weight. .

  As described above, also in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the central winning unit 37 (the route distribution area 406 of the specific area 401) almost simultaneously or in succession, the plurality of game balls are added. In any case, by providing a route distribution device 703 for guiding to the special guide unit 705, a plurality of game balls can be entered into the specific area 401 at the same time, and the expectation of entering the special pocket unit 416a is increased. Can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to derive the behavior of the game ball that meets the player's expectation that the expectation level of jackpot is improved by making a plurality of game balls enter the specific area 401 together.

  (A-2) In the example of (a-1) described above, when the number of game balls placed on the front piece 905 of the distribution plate 903 is reduced from a plurality to one, the distribution plate 903 is a reference from the rotation posture. There is a concern that a game ball may be caught between the front piece 905 of the distribution plate 903 and the glass unit 137 in order to return to the posture, but a configuration for preventing this may be added. For example, in front of the front piece 905 of the sorting plate 903 in the reference posture, it extends from a position below the front piece 905 to a position above the front piece 905 and has substantially the same width as the front piece 905. A relatively light and transparent front cover whose upper side is pivotally supported may be provided. In this case, even when a game ball is sandwiched between the front piece 905 of the distribution plate 903 that returns from the rotation posture to the reference posture and the front cover, the front cover is rotated and displaced in a follow-up manner. Thus, the displacement of the distribution plate 903 is allowed.

  It is to be noted that the angle of the distribution plate 903 that becomes a rotation posture by simply shortening the front and rear width of the front piece portion 905 or placing a plurality of game balls on the front piece portion 905 is (the momentum of rotation). Etc.) by configuring the game ball placed on the front piece portion 905 to be larger than the angle at which the game ball falls on the special guide portion 705, the front piece portion 905 of the distribution plate 903, the glass unit 137, You may suppress that a game ball is pinched | interposed between. Further, in the above-described embodiment or the like, when the blade member 404 is opened, only one game ball enters the specific area 401 (the entrance opening 403), and only one game ball is entered into the route distribution device 703. Even when guided, the game ball may be guided to the special guide unit 705 (although it is very low).

  (B) In addition, the distribution means for distributing the game balls to either the safe passage 427 provided with the special entry detection switch 461 or the out passage 428 provided with the non-special entry detection switch 462 (in the above embodiment, , The configuration of the rotating body unit 410) and the game ball after being detected by the special entrance detection switch 461 are guided to either the 15R entrance 731, the 7R entrance 732, or the 3R entrance 733. The configuration of the type distribution device 741 is not particularly limited, and can be designed as appropriate.

  For example, the rotating body unit 410 of the above embodiment includes a game ball that has reached the front of the rotating body 414 (gate portion 435) via the left safe passage 427 and a rotating body 414 via the right safe passage 427. However, for example, a structure in which the game ball is guided to the rotating body 414 in order (for example, the left route is directly connected to the rotating body 414). The route on the right side is finally routed through the route on the left side, and then the game ball guided through the route on the right side guided to the front of the rotating body 414 enters the route on the left side. In order to prevent a large back flow from the left route, a device for reducing the momentum is provided at the entrance to the left route (for example, a valve that opens and closes freely can be opened by the weight of the game ball). Good

  Further, for example, with respect to the type sorting device 741, an inclined plate (front side portion is inclined to the front right) that is adjacent to the right side of the start table 742 and extends slightly downward toward the right side, And an extrusion shutter that can be projected and retracted at an upper position, an inlet to the 3R guide passage 743 is disposed upstream of the inclined plate, and an inlet to the 7R guide passage 745 is disposed downstream of the inclined plate. The entrance to the 15R guide passage 746 may be arranged on the right side of.

  Note that the probability and ratio of a game ball that has entered the winning / failing lottery area 407 entering the safe passage 427 (detected by the special ball detection switch 461) is appropriately set for each model of the pachinko machine. . For example, the number of the special pocket portions 416a and the non-special pocket portions 416b of the rotator 414 of the rotator unit 410 may be increased to 8 in total, or the number of the special pocket portions 416a and the non-special pocket portions 416b. For example, the probability that the game ball that has reached the rotating body unit 410 enters the special pocket portion 416a may be changed by changing the ratio to 2 to 6, 3 to 5, or the like.

  Further, the distribution means may not be rotating but may reciprocate, and the direction and pattern of the operation are not particularly limited. Furthermore, the distribution means does not have to operate. For example, the special pocket portion 416a and the non-special pocket portion 416b may be fixedly provided. It is good also as providing the structure which makes the behavior of a game ball like a nail random.

  (C) In the above embodiment, of the 3R guide passage 743, the 7R guide passage 745, and the 15R guide passage 746 in the type lottery area 408, the entrance of the passage that can be expected to generate a jackpot state that is more advantageous to the player It is configured to be arranged on the downstream side of the moving path of game balls in the type lottery area 408, but from the time until the game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408 is detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736 However, the time until the game ball that entered the type lottery area 408 is detected by the 7R entrance detection switch 735 is shorter, and the game ball that entered the type lottery area 408 is detected by the 7R entrance detection switch 735. The time until the game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408 is detected by the 15R entrance detection switch 734 is shorter than the time until Only it needs to be configured. For example, you may arrange | position to the upstream in the classification | category lottery area | region 408, so that the entrance of the channel | path which can have expectation in generation | occurrence | production to the jackpot state more advantageous for a player can be had. However, it is possible to improve the gameability and the like by taking the opportunity to give a jackpot state that is more advantageous to the player as much as possible. In particular, when a configuration in which the distribution of the moving paths of the game balls in the type lottery area 408 is performed in a plurality of stages as in the above-described embodiment, this effect is more remarkable.

  (D) Further, the 7R guide passage 745 is configured to have a longer moving distance of the game ball than the 15R guide passage 746, and the 3R guide passage 743 has a longer travel distance of the game ball than the 7R guide passage 745. Basically, the 7R guide passage 745 is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass is longer than the 15R guide passage 746, and the 3R guide passage 743 passes the game ball more than the 7R guide passage 745. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that the time which requires may become long. For example, by changing the inclination of the 3R guide path 743, 7R guide path 745, 15R guide path 746, delay means such that the game ball moves forward or backward after several rounds of the same place, Delay means for temporarily stopping the momentum of the ball and guiding it to the next place over a relatively long time may be installed in the 3R guide passage 743 or the like. Incidentally, such delay means may be installed in both the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745. In this case, the time required for the game ball to pass through the 7R guide passage 745 is the same as that of the 3R guide passage 743. Install something that will not be longer than the time required to pass.

  Of the game balls that have entered each of the two special pocket portions 416a of the rotating body 414, the game balls that have entered the type lottery area 408 earlier are detected earlier than the 3R entry detection switch 736. The game ball is configured to be detected by the 7R entrance detection switch 735, and the subsequent game ball is detected by the 15R entrance detection switch earlier than the preceding game ball is detected by the 7R entrance detection switch 735. 734 is configured to be detected. It is also possible to omit the 15R guide passage 746 (configured so that the game ball jumps directly into the 15R entrance 731 from the second transfer plate 747).

  (E) In the above embodiment, the number and contents of the jackpot type are not particularly limited, and are appropriately set for each model of the pachinko machine. Further, the number and contents of the game modes such as the normal mode and the time reduction mode are not particularly limited. For example, in the above-described embodiment, in the time reduction mode, the variation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is shortened, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 that teaches the result of the entrance assist lottery is shortened, and The opening time of the second variable winning device 33b is configured to be longer, but instead of or in addition to this, the probability of winning a small hit in the winning / losing lottery is increased, or the winning of the winning assist lottery is performed. You may comprise so that a probability may be raised. In addition, for example, as a game mode, not only the opening / closing member 33c of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently, but also the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device. You may set a probability change mode that increases the probability of winning a big or small win in the winning lottery based on the entry to 33b. A latent mode that increases the probability of performing may be set. Note that, in the winning lottery, it may be configured not to win a jackpot.

  (F) In the above embodiment, both the route distribution device 703 and the type distribution device 741 are provided in the specific area 401, but either one may be omitted. In the above embodiment, the central winning unit 37 determines whether or not to give a jackpot state, and determines the type of the jackpot state based on the behavior of the game ball that has entered the ball (the destination). However, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration.

  (F-1) For example, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball detected by the special entrance detection switch 461 enters any of the 15R entrance 731, the 7R entrance 732, and the 3R entrance 733. The jackpot type is determined in an analog manner depending on whether or not the type distribution device 741 is omitted, and when the special entry detection switch 461 is detected, the value of the corresponding random number counter is acquired and acquired. The jackpot type may be determined by lottery such as which jackpot type corresponds to the value of the random number counter. Further, for example, when a winning lottery is made based on the winning / losing lottery performed based on the entering of the game balls into the start winning devices 33a and 33b, the central winning unit 37 is opened in correspondence with the small winnings. When the game ball enters and the game ball enters the special pocket portion 416a and the safe passage 427 (detected by the special ball detection switch 461), the jackpot type to be given is also determined. You may comprise as follows. Even in the case of adopting these configurations, a route distribution device 703 is provided that can guide a plurality of game balls to the special passage 702 when a plurality of game balls entering the specific area 401 are distributed simultaneously. Thus, when a phenomenon occurs in which a game ball enters a specific area 401 almost simultaneously, and a phenomenon that a big hit state is likely to occur sensuously occurs substantially, You can increase the expectation of jackpot

  Further, in the above embodiment, the route distribution device 703 receives a game ball, and thereby a jackpot state is given, and a safe passage 427 to which a specified number of prize balls are given, and a game ball enters. Thus, although it is configured to guide the game ball to either the out passage 428 to which a specified number of award balls are given, but the jackpot state is not given (disengaged), it is limited to such a configuration. It is not something. For example, in a configuration in which the type distribution device 741 is omitted, whether or not to generate a jackpot state when a game ball enters (game ball is detected) and a type lottery that determines the type of the jackpot state The first starting entrance means (first starting entrance detection means) as the first entrance means to be performed and whether the game ball enters (detection of the game ball) generates a big hit state A second starting entrance means (second starting entrance detecting means) as a second entrance means for performing a lottery determination of whether or not and a type lottery for determining the type of the jackpot state, the first starting entrance means Rather than assigning the type of jackpot state that can be awarded when winning the jackpot state in the winning lottery performed based on the entrance of the game ball to the game ball, the game ball enters the second starting entrance means It was a big win in the lottery In the configuration in which the sort of jackpot state that can be given when the state is won is more advantageous for the advantager, the route sorter 703 is either the first start ball entering means or the second start ball entering means. In the case of two balls (a plurality of balls in the above embodiment (a-1)), the game ball is guided to the second start ball entering means. ) May be configured as follows.

  Further, for example, a first ball entry means (first ball entry detection means) to which m game balls are given when a game ball enters (game ball detection is performed), and a game ball enters the ball. A second ball entry unit (second ball detection unit) to which more than m game balls are given by performing (game ball detection is performed). The game ball is guided to either one ball entry means or the second ball entry means (in the case of one ball, the ball is guided to the first ball entry means, and two balls (in the above embodiment (a-1), a plurality of balls)) In such a case, it may be configured to guide to the second entry means).

  (F-2) Also, for example, a route in which the possibility of being guided to the special passage 702 is (substantially) low if a plurality of game balls do not enter the specific area 401 almost at the same time as in the above embodiment. A route distribution device in which the distribution device 703 is omitted, and instead, even when game balls enter the specific area 401 one by one, such game balls may be guided to the special passage 702. (It may or may not be movable) may be provided. In addition, for example, the special passage 702 may be omitted (configured so that there is no advantage / disadvantage with respect to entering the safe passage 427 by the moving path of the game ball), or the game ball entering the specific area 401 is rotated. The route to reach the body 414 may be configured to be a single road, and the route distribution device 703 may be omitted.

  (F-3) Further, for example, when the central winning unit 37 is configured as a second variable winning device, and a big win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning to the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, The blade member 404 may be configured to be opened in a predetermined number of rounds. In this case, the central winning unit 37 has a role of determining a game mode to be given after the end of the jackpot state, specifically, for example, a role of giving either the time reduction mode or the probability change mode after the end of the jackpot state. (1: The type lottery area 408 in the above embodiment is omitted, and it is determined whether or not the rotator unit 410 gives the probability variation mode (the specific pocket portion 416 is entered to enter the special entry detection switch 461). Probability mode is given by detection, and the non-special entry detection switch 462 may be detected before that) (2: Winning lottery area 407 in the above embodiment, and The route distribution area 406 is omitted, and the type distribution device 741 determines whether or not to give the probability variation mode (in the above embodiment, the 15R entrance detection switch Detection of the other switches 745 and 746 which are set so that the time reduction mode is given by the detection being performed before the probability change mode is given by the detection of the switch configured as 34. It may be configured to be invalid).

  Furthermore, the first start winning device 33a without the opening / closing member 33c is arranged below or in the left game area of the central winning unit 37, and the second starting winning device 33b having the opening / closing member 33c is connected to the central winning unit 37. Arranged in the right game area (right game area), the through gate 34 is arranged only in the right game area, and in the normal mode, the winning probability of the entrance assist lottery is low, and the opening / closing member 33c is opened. Otherwise, it may be configured such that it is impossible to enter the second start winning device 33b.

  In addition, the big hit state given when winning in the winning lottery performed based on the game ball entering the second start winning device 33b is the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a. It is configured so that there is a high possibility that the player will be in a jackpot state that is advantageous to the player or that an advantageous jackpot state will be selected, rather than the jackpot state that is awarded when winning in the lottery decision based on May be. For example, when a big win is won in the winning lottery based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a, the end condition of the predetermined big hit round in the big win state is that the central winning unit 37 is opened twice per second. Or, if the maximum number of eight winnings is set, and a big win is won in the winning lottery based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b, the end condition of the predetermined big hit round in the big win state is The central winning unit 37 may be configured such that the opening is 30 times × 1 time, or eight balls are set as the upper limit. In this case, since the number of game balls that enter the central winning unit 37 increases in a predetermined jackpot round in the jackpot state based on the winning to the second starting winning device 33b, the winning to the second starting winning device 33b is increased. A big hit state based on a sphere is more advantageous.

  (G) In the above embodiment, the pair of left and right blade members 404 operate in synchronism, that is, when one is in the open position, the other is also in the open position, and one is in the closed position. Although the other is also configured to be in the closed position, it may be configured such that only one of them may operate independently. In other words, when winning a small hit in the winning / losing lottery, both of the left and right pair of blade members 404 have an open position and a pattern in which only the right side is in an open position, and both are in an open position. May be configured to exist. Furthermore, as a pattern in which both are in the open position, a pattern in which both are opened and closed at the same timing, a pattern in which the left side is early, and a pattern in which the right side is fast may be set. In addition, it may be possible to teach which of the blade members 404 is opened by liquid crystal display, sound, lighting of the light emitting means, or the like (there may be a taught state and a non-taught state). .

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the specific area 401 is changed into the state which can enter the specific area 401 with the blade | wing member 404, and the state which cannot enter, the blade | wing member 404 is omitted, or In addition to the entrance opening 403 that is opened and closed by the blade member 404, there is a possibility of always entering the specific area 401 by providing an opening that allows entry into the specific area 401 or the like. You may comprise as follows.

  (H) Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the first game ball that has entered the left first entrance opening 403a of the pair of left and right entrance openings 403 in the central winning unit 37 is guided to the route distribution device 703. The lengths of the introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b for guiding the game ball that has entered the right second entrance opening 403b to the route distribution device 703 are configured to be the same, but are different. You may comprise as follows. In addition, one or both of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b may be provided with a movable passage that makes the introduction passages 718a and 718b longer or shorter (or changes the moving speed of the game ball). . When these configurations are adopted, the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 723 of the route distribution device 703 can be used even if game balls do not enter the first entrance opening 403a and the second entrance opening 403b at the same time. There is a possibility that two game balls fall on the wing 715 at the same time.

  In the above embodiment, the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b are folded back and forth, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the game balls moving through the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b. At least the portion near the exit may be configured to extend in the left-right direction and be visible from the front (partitioned by a transparent front panel or opened forward).

  Moreover, while adopting the route distribution device 703 of the above-described embodiment, the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b may be merged as in the above-described aspect example (a-1). Further, when such a configuration is adopted, it is configured such that game balls can be dropped simultaneously on the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 of the route distribution device 703 (the width of the exit of the introduction passage after the merge is Wide). In addition, in the vicinity of the exit of the introduction passage after the merge, it may be configured to make it easier for the player to recognize the game ball, such as a slow movement of the game ball, rolling left and right and then falling . When such a configuration is adopted, when a plurality of game balls enter one of the first entrance openings 403a or the second entrance openings 403b in succession, There is a possibility that the game ball falls simultaneously on the first wing 714 and the second wing 715 of the route distribution device 703. For this reason, even if it does not aim at the launch position of the game ball so that the game ball enters the specific area 401 from both the first entrance opening 403a and the second entrance opening 403b, it enters either one. It is only necessary to aim at the launch position of the game ball so that it is easy to hit the ball, so that operability and game play are simplified (for example, games that do not know game play such as both must be entered simultaneously) No one can do it). The entrance opening 403 may be provided at one place.

  Furthermore, a stopping means is provided in the introduction passage 718. For example, a game ball that has entered the specific area 404 (entrance opening 403) while the left and right blade members 404 are opened once is temporarily stopped in the stopping means. After being made, it may be configured to be guided to the route distribution device 703 at once. In this case, even if the timing of entering the specific area 404 (the entrance opening 403) is slightly shifted, if the game ball can enter the specific area 404 between the time when the blade member 404 is opened and closed. In addition, it is possible to match the timing of dropping to the route distribution device 703.

  The stopping means may be configured to switch between an open state in which movement to the route distribution device 703 is allowed and a closed state in which the movement to the route distribution device 703 is permitted for a certain period of time. The displacement between the open position where movement to the device 703 is allowed and the closed position where the movement is permitted is relatively slow, and the operation of the stopping means is relatively slow until the stopping means is switched from the closed position to the open position. The game ball that has entered the specific area 404 (the ball opening 403) while the blade member 404 is open may be stopped by the stopping means.

  (I) In the above embodiment, in the preceding effect process, the setting process of the 3R preceding opening command or the 7R preceding is performed only when the value of the ball entry counter is 0 and the value of the ball clogging counter is 1. Although the opening command setting process is performed, the opening command setting process may be performed regardless of the value of the ball clogging counter as long as the value of the entrance counter is 0. If the value of the ball clogging counter is other than 0, an opening command setting process may be performed (in the case of 0, for example, an error process is performed).

  That is, when the value of the ball clogging counter is 2 or more, another game ball precedes the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754, and the 3R induction passage 743 or the 7R guidance passage. 745 already exists. In the above-described embodiment, if there is a preceding game ball, the jackpot state will be started without waiting so much, so that the derivation of the leading opening effect is refrained. In addition, by adopting such a configuration, for example, the detection of the 7R early detection switch 754 has been confirmed, but at that time, there is already a game ball that is moving in the 3R guide passage 743 (near the exit). Therefore, even if a pre-opening effect for 7 rounds jackpot is performed based on the detection of the 7R early detection switch 754, in reality, a situation where 3 round jackpots are given instead of 7 round jackpots is avoided. can do.

  However, if the game ball passes through the 3R guide passage 743 or the 7R guide passage 745, the reaction regarding the occurrence of the jackpot is derived after the value of the entrance counter becomes 0. There is a possibility that the time lag until the time is too long. In such a case, as described above, even if the value of the ball clogging counter is not 1, the concern can be suppressed by deriving the preceding opening effect.

  Further, even when such a configuration is adopted, since the value of the ball counter is 0, there is no possibility that the subsequent game ball will generate a more advantageous jackpot state. Although the effect is derived, another game ball is detected by the 15R entrance detection switch 734 before the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736, and 15 It is possible to avoid a situation in which a big hit condition for a round big hit occurs.

  After step S7705 in FIG. 32, a process of turning on a 3R passing flag indicating that the game ball is passing through the 3R guide passage 743 is added, and after step S7711, the game ball passes through the 7R guide passage 745. A process of turning on a 7R passing flag indicating that the vehicle is passing is added. Further, in step S7703, instead of the process of determining the value of the ball clogging counter, it is determined whether or not the 7R passing flag is turned on, and if the determination is affirmative, the game passing through the 7R guiding path 745 Since the ball will be detected first by the 7R entrance detection switch 735, a preceding opening command for 7 rounds jackpot is set (if a negative determination is made, the preceding opening command for 3 rounds jackpot is set) Set). Also, in step S7709, instead of the process of determining the value of the ball clogging counter, it is determined whether or not the 3R passing flag is turned on. A common preceding opening command may be set, or the preceding opening command may not be set (if a negative determination is made, a preceding opening command for 7 rounds jackpot is set). In addition, for example, the preceding opening effect may be shared by 7 round jackpots and 3 round jackpots (same form). When these configurations are adopted, it is possible to avoid a contradiction between the aspect of the preceding opening effect and the actual jackpot type. The 3R passing flag and the 7R passing flag are turned off at the start or end of the big hit state.

  (J) In the remaining ball monitoring process of the above embodiment, an error notification process performed when the value of the monitoring timer becomes 0 in a state where it is determined that the value of the entrance counter is other than 0, and a ball clogging counter The error notification mode (contents) may be different from the error notification processing performed when the value of the monitoring timer becomes 0 in a state where it is determined that the value of the error is other than 0. That is, by the entrance counter, the 3R early detection switch 753, the 7R early detection switch 754, and the 15R entrance detection switch 734 on the upstream side of the route allocation area 406, the success / failure lottery area 407, and the type lottery area 408 are upstream. It can be understood that game balls are jammed in the area. Further, the ball clogging counter causes the type lottery area 408 to be downstream from the 3R early detection switch 753 and upstream from the 3R incoming detection switch 736, or downstream from the 7R early detection switch 754. In addition, it is possible to grasp that the game ball is clogged in a region upstream of the 7R entrance detection switch 735, that is, in the 3R guide passage 743 or the 7R guide passage 745. Therefore, by making the error notification different, it is possible to more specifically indicate where the clogging has occurred in the specific area 401.

  (K) In the above embodiment, when the preceding opening effect is performed, the jackpot state in which the opening effect is shortened is configured, but the jackpot state in which the opening effect is omitted is configured. May be.

  (L) In the above embodiment, when a detection switch is installed in the special guide unit 705 or the special passage 702 and a game ball is detected, a sound effect for teaching that the game ball is passing the special route, A lamp lighting effect or the like may be generated.

  (M) In the above embodiment, the translucent covering cover 756 that covers the front of the 3R guiding path 743 and the 7R guiding path 745 is provided, but the design of the covering cover 756 can be changed as appropriate, The covering cover 756 can be omitted. Further, for example, LEDs that emit light toward the back surface of the 3R seal 757a, 7R seal 757b, or 15R seal 757c are provided, and the 3R early detection switch 753, 7R early detection switch 754, or 15R entrance detection switch When the detection by 734 is performed, the corresponding LED may be turned on. Further, it may be configured to blink when the promotion is being accepted.

  (N) In the above embodiment, regardless of which of the first starting prize-winning device 33a and the second starting prize-winning device 33b is entered, the winning probability of winning / no-win lottery, the variable display time, etc. are the same. When a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a and when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, a big hit or a small win is assigned in the lottery, or each lottery is won. You may comprise so that the content etc. of privilege may differ. For example, based on the first special display device in which a variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination performed based on the winning in the first start winning device 33a and the winning in the second starting winning device 33b is performed. And a second special display device that performs a variable display for teaching the result of the winning / losing lottery performed in this way, and when winning a lottery based on winning / losing lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a The blade member 404 is opened only once for 1 second at a rate of 9/10, and the blade member 404 is opened twice for 1 second at a rate of 1/10 to enter the second start winning device 33b. In the case of winning the winning lottery based on the above, the blade member 404 is opened only once for 1 second at a rate of 1/10, and the blade member 404 is 2 seconds for 1 second at a rate of 9/10. May be configured to be opened once

  (O) In the above embodiment, a total of four variable displays can be held on the special display device 43 that teaches the result of the lottery based on the winning to the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. However, the number of reservations is not particularly limited. For example, it is good also as a structure which can hold | maintain up to 4 (total 8) fluctuation display respectively corresponding to each ball | bowl to each 1st start winning device 33a and the 2nd starting winning device 33b. In the case of adopting this configuration, it may be configured such that the number of variable display suspensions based on the entrance to each start winning device 33a, 33b can be separately grasped. In addition, when adopting the configuration, for example, the variable display based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b is digested with priority over the variable display based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a. It may be configured such that the variable display corresponding to the order in which the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b have entered the balls is executed.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the fluctuation | variation display of a lottery determination is not suspended. In addition, the number of hold of the variable display for teaching the result of the entrance assist lottery is not particularly limited, and it may be configured such that less than 4 or more than 5 holds can be made. It is good also as a structure by which a variable display is not suspended.

  (P) Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, two starting ball entering means (the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b) are provided, but one may be provided, or three or more may be provided. . Further, the arrangement of the starting ball entering means is not particularly limited. In the above embodiment, there may be a case where a “big hit” (direct hit big hit) is won in the lottery performed based on the winning to the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, but the starting winning devices 33a and 33b are entered. In the lottery based on, it may be configured so that the “big hit” is not determined (so that it is distributed to “small hit” or “out”). Furthermore, the configuration may be such that when the start winning devices 33a and 33b enter the ball, the blade member 404 is always opened (so that it always “small hits” and does not come off). Moreover, in the said embodiment, you may comprise so that the blade member 404 may be open | released in multiple times (for example, twice) per "small hit" once.

  (Q) You may implement as a pachinko machine of a different type from the above-mentioned embodiment. For example, the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is omitted, and based on the winning of the special winning opening 442 and the non-special winning opening 443 (detection of the special winning detection switch 461 and the non-special winning detection switch 462). A predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened, or for a predetermined number (for example, eight) in the specific area 401. The game may be applied to a gaming machine in which the game state is a jackpot state during which a game ball enters a round and the game state is repeated for a predetermined round (for example, 3, 8, or 16 rounds). In this case, the central winning unit 37 also functions as the variable winning device 32. In addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a sparrow ball similar thereto may be used.

  (R) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with vibration detecting means for detecting the vibration of the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko machine 10 is shaken in a state in which the power is turned on. If the vibration is detected by the vibration detecting means, error processing (error notification in the pachinko machine 10, temporary suspension of the game (normal processing, etc.), outside of the hall computer, etc. Error information output).

  Further, in a case where a game ball enters the type lottery area 408 such as when the special ball detection switch 461 (type entry detection unit) is detected, the decorative symbol display device 42 (display unit) , “Please do not shake the base. If the vibration is detected, the jackpot may be invalidated”, etc. Such guidance may be preferably completed after the game ball is detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461 and before entering the type lottery area 408). In this case, it can be suppressed that the player is too enthusiastic (unintentionally or intentionally) to swing the pachinko machine 10, and the behavior of the game ball is caused by the swing of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a change occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unfavorable situation for the player who vibrates the pachinko machine 10 and the game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

  In addition, when the vibration detection level by the vibration detection means is set in a plurality of stages and the special ball detection switch 461 is detected, the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 or the like. You may comprise so that a detection level may be raised (detection is possible also with a smaller vibration). In addition, error processing is not performed with one vibration detection, but an error is displayed when a vibration is detected after a warning is displayed once (for example, when a warning is displayed). You may comprise so that a process may be performed.

  (S) In the above embodiment, the occurrence of the big hit state is not determined based on the detection of the special entry detection switch 461 (for example, the special entry detection switch 46 is omitted or the special entry detection switch 46 is It is configured to determine the occurrence of various types of jackpot states based on the detection of the 15R entrance detection switch 734, the 7R entrance detection switch 735, and the 3R entrance detection switch 736. May be.

  The central winning unit 37 is provided separately from the special winning detection switch 461, and includes a type entry detection switch (type entry detection means) for detecting a game ball (immediately preceding) derived to the type lottery area 408. A back passage counter that is counted up based on the detection of the special entry detection switch 461 and is counted down based on the detection of the type entry detection switch, and provided near the entrance to the type lottery area 408, It is good also as providing the classification approach standby lamp (two in this example) by which lighting control is carried out correspondingly. In this case, the number of game balls entering the type lottery area 408 can be easily grasped.

  Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, a player (a front passage) from the rotating body 414 (safe passage 427) to the type lottery area 408 (start stand 742) can be visually recognized by the player in front. It may be configured. Further, the back passage may be configured to flow down one by one so that the order of the game balls is not changed. In addition, in a back passage or the like, interval adjusting means for adjusting the interval of game balls that continuously enter the type lottery area 408 (a shutter that opens and closes at a predetermined interval, rotates at a fixed interval, and moves the game balls one by one downstream) It is good also as providing the wind vehicle etc. which can be guided. In this case, it is possible to suppress variation in behavior of game balls that continuously enter the type lottery area 408.

  (T) In the above embodiment, the special entry detection switch 461, the non-special entry detection switch 462, the entry count switch 437, the 15R entry detection switch 734, the 7R entry detection switch 7345, the 3R entry detection switch 736, Detection history storage means capable of accumulating and storing detection information (detection history) of the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754 is provided, and the storage contents of the detection history storage means can be derived to the decorative symbol display device 42 and the like. It may be configured. Furthermore, the detection information may be configured to be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (a hall computer or the like) at every detection or at predetermined intervals. In this case, since the behavior history of the game ball in the specific area 401 is clearly left, a trouble of where the game ball has entered between the player and the game hall is generated and is prevented from becoming complicated. Can do.

  In particular, when the time of a real-time clock for grasping the current time provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the detection history are stored in association with each other, such operational effects are more remarkably exhibited. The detection history stored in the detection history storage unit may be deleted in a predetermined period (one day, one week, etc.) or may be deleted by a RAM clear operation. Good (power on or off is not desirable). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can derive | lead-out the value of a ball-entry counter or a ball clogging counter to the decoration symbol display apparatus 42 or the pachinko machine 10 exterior.

  (U) The central winning unit 37 may be provided with a stopping means capable of stopping the game ball moving in the specific area 401. Here, an example of a mode for embodying the stopping means in the type distribution device 741 will be described with reference to FIG. In the above embodiment, the upper limit of game balls continuously entering the type lottery area 408 is substantially two balls. However, in this embodiment, three or more game balls are continuously typed lottery. It is assumed that the area 408 can enter a ball (for example, there are four or more pocket portions 416 and three or more special pocket portions 416a of the rotating body 414).

  As shown in FIGS. 45A and 45B, the type distribution device 741 is provided adjacent to the downstream (right side) edge of the start table 742, and is inclined slightly downward toward the right side as the start table 742 is. And a distribution plate 931 extending. By forming three circular holes in plan view in which the game balls can enter in the distribution plate 931 so as to be arranged in the longitudinal direction of the distribution plate 931, it is possible to enter each game ball one by one. 3R stop 933, 7R stop 934, and 15R stop 935 are provided.

  Below the sorting plate 931, the game balls that have entered the 3R stop 933, 7R stop 934, 15R stop 935 are supported, and the game balls are supported by the 3R stop 933, 7R stop 934, 15R stop. A stationary rotating body 937 is provided as a retaining means that can be retained at 935. The stationary rotating body 937 has a substantially cylindrical shape, and is provided so that the center line of the cylindrical body is a rotation center axis, and the rotation center axis extends in the left-right direction along the longitudinal direction of the distribution plate 931.

  Further, on the outer peripheral surface of the stationary rotating body 937, there is provided a discharge recess 938 that is formed at a position corresponding to each of the 3R stationary portion 933, the 7R stationary portion 934, and the 15R stationary portion 935 and can accommodate a game ball. . Further, below the stationary rotator 937, inlets of the 3R guide passage 743, the 7R guide passage 745, and the 15R guide passage 746 are provided.

  With the rotation of the stationary rotating body 937, a period in which each discharge recess 938 matches the 3R stationary part 933, the 7R stationary part 934, and the 15R stationary part 935 and a non-matching period are repeated. Yes. That is, when the discharge recess 938 does not match the 3R stop 933, the 7R stop 934, and the 15R stop 935 (the discharge recess 938 faces downward), the 3R stop 933, 7R stop The game balls that have entered the 934, 15R stop 935 are stopped at the 3R stop 933, 7R stop 934, 15R stop 935. Thereafter, when the stationary rotating body 937 rotates until the discharge recess 938 matches the 3R stationary part 933, the 7R stationary part 934, and the 15R stationary part 935, the 3R stationary part 933, the 7R stationary part 934, and the 15R stationary part 935 The stopped game ball is accommodated in the corresponding discharge recess 938. Further, the rotation of the stationary rotating body 937 causes the game balls accommodated in the discharge recesses 938 to enter the corresponding 3R guide passages 743, 7R guide passages 745, and 15R guide passages 746. In other words, the game ball stopped at the 3R stop 933 enters the 3R guide passage 743, and the game ball stopped at the 7R stop 934 enters the 7R guide passage 745 and stops at the 15R stop 935. The game ball enters the 15R guide passage 746.

  The stationary rotating body 937 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown) and rotates so that the surface facing upward moves forward. Further, in the present embodiment, when there is no game ball entering the type lottery area 408, the stationary rotating body 937 is stopped in a reference posture (reference position) in which the discharge recess 938 faces downward. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, when a game ball is detected by the special ball detection switch 461 as the arrival detection means, the stepping motor is driven and the stationary rotating body 937 starts to rotate. In this example, the stationary rotating body 937 is displaced from the reference posture to the receiving posture in 6.5 seconds from the reference posture, and is displaced to the receiving posture in which the discharge recess 938 is directed upward, and is displaced from the receiving posture to the reference posture in 3 seconds. Is configured to do. In addition, the game balls stopped in the 3R stop 933, 7R stop 934, and 15R stop 935 are simultaneously stored in the discharge recesses 938 of the stop rotator 937, and simultaneously from the discharge recesses 938, the 3R guide passages. 743, 7R guide passages 745, 15R guide passages 746 are entered.

  The stationary rotating body 937 that has returned to the reference posture after one rotation is stopped in this posture. Furthermore, the stationary rotating body 937 is configured to always rotate (until the end of the ending) during the big hit state. Also, at the end of the jackpot state, the remaining spheres in the specific area 401 are checked. If there is no remaining sphere, the jackpot state ends, and if there is a remaining sphere, the predetermined time is the extension of the ending, the predetermined time An error is displayed when the above is reached. In addition, there are a valid state where the detection of the 3R entrance detection switch 736, 7R entrance detection switch 735, 15R entrance detection switch 734 is valid and an invalid invalid state, and the 3R entrance detection switch 736, 7R entrance When the detection switch 735, 15R entrance detection switch 734 is detected, the state is switched to the invalid state, and when the remaining ball in the specific area 401 is lost at the end of the big hit state, the state is switched to the valid state.

  Incidentally, the time from when the game ball accommodated in the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 enters the safe passage 427 to reach the type lottery area 408 is about 2 seconds. In this example, the state where the game ball is accommodated in the discharge recess 938 of the stationary rotator 937 and the stationary rotator 937 is moving corresponds to the guiding state, and the other state corresponds to the stationary state.

  Further, the 7R entry detection after the game ball enters the 7R guide passage 745 is longer than the 15R arrival time from when the game ball enters the 15R guide passage 746 until it is detected by the 15R entrance detection switch 734. It is configured so that the 7R arrival time until it is detected by the switch 735 is longer (moving distance becomes longer), and the 3R after the game ball enters the 3R guide passage 743 than the 7R arrival time. It is configured so that the 3R arrival time until it is detected by the entrance detection switch 736 becomes longer (the moving distance becomes longer). For this reason, when a game ball is stopped at the 15R stop 935, the big hit state of “15R jackpot” is determined regardless of whether the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop 933 or the 7R stop 934. Will occur. In addition, when a game ball is stopped at the 7R stop 934 and no game ball is stopped at the 15R stop 935, regardless of whether or not the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop 933, "7R big hit Is a big hit state. Further, when the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop 933 and the game ball is not stopped at the 7R stop 934 and the 15R stop 935, a “3R jackpot” jackpot state is generated. . As in the above embodiment, in the state where the big hit state or the occurrence of the big hit state is determined, the game ball is detected by the 3R incoming detection switch 736, the 7R incoming detection switch 735, and the 15R incoming detection switch 734. Even if it is made, the detection of the jackpot state corresponding to the detection is not provided.

  Moreover, in this example, the game ball stopped by entering the 3R stopping part 933, the 7R stopping part 934, and the 15R stopping part 935 is detected at a position between the distribution plate 931 and the stopping rotating body 937. A 3R standby detection switch 941, a 7R standby detection switch 942, and a 15R standby detection switch 943 are provided. Further, on the vertical wall surface behind the distribution plate 931, 3R standby lamps 944 and 7R standby lamps 945 as entrance display parts corresponding to the rear positions of the 3R stop parts 933, 7R stop parts 934, and 15R stop parts 935. , 15R standby lamp 946 is provided.

  In this example, when the 3R standby detection switch 941 is detected, the 3R standby lamp 944 is lit, and when the 7R standby detection switch 942 is detected, the 7R standby lamp 945 is lit. When the 15R standby detection switch 943 is detected, the 15R standby lamp 946 is turned on, and when a predetermined big hit state occurs, the various standby lamps 944, 945, and 946 are turned off. Further, the decorative symbol display device 42 derives the display of “Lottery type lottery” based on the detection information of the special ball detection switch 461 and “15 rounds” when the 15R standby detection switch 943 is detected. “Congratulations on winning the jackpot” is derived, the 7R standby detection switch 942 is detected, and the 15R standby detection switch 943 is not detected. When the 3R standby detection switch 941 is detected and the 7R standby detection switch 942 and the 15R standby detection switch 943 are not detected, the 3R standby detection switch 941 is detected. However, the display of "Lottery type lottery in progress" continues to be derived It has become just that. Note that the standby teaching means (early teaching means) functions to turn on the standby lamps 944, 945, 946 and to derive the display of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the detection information of the standby detection switches 941, 942, 943. ).

  Further, in this example, the distribution plate 931 is arranged in a sequence of 3R stop 933, 7R stop 934, 15R stop 935 from the upstream side, and game balls are basically stopped at the 3R stop 933. If a game ball enters the type lottery area 408 (start stand 742) without being played, the game ball enters the 3R stop 933 and stops at the 3R stop 933. Yes.

  Further, when a game ball enters the type lottery area 408 while the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop 933, the game ball gets over the game ball stopped at the 3R stop 933 ( It reaches the 7R stop 934 and enters the 7R stop 934 to be stopped.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the type lottery area 408 in a state where the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop 933 and the 7R stop 934, the game ball is moved to the 3R stop 933 and the 7R stop 934. Over the game ball that is stopped at (and made a stepping foot), reaches the 15R stop 935, enters the 15R stop 935, and is stopped.

  Also, adjacent to the downstream edge of the distribution plate 931, the game balls that have not entered any of the 3R stop portion 933, the 7R stop portion 934, and the 15R stop portion 935 are received, and the pachinko machine 10 A discharge port 948 for discharging to the outside is provided. In addition, a discharge detection switch 949 that detects a game ball discharged from the discharge port 948 is provided in order to grasp the presence or absence (remaining ball) of the game ball in the specific area 401. The value of is subtracted.

  In this example, the 3R stop 933 is a first stop for the 7R stop 934 and the 15R stop 935, the 7R stop 934 is a second stop for the 3R stop 933, and the 15R The 15R stop 935 is a second stop for the 3R stop 933 and the 7R stop 934. Further, the 3R standby detection switch 941 is a first standby detection unit for the 7R standby detection switch 942 and the 15R standby detection switch 943, and the 7R standby detection switch 942 is a second standby detection unit for the 3R standby detection switch 941. The 15R standby detection switch 943 is a second standby detection unit for the 3R standby detection switch 941 and the 7R standby detection switch 942. In addition, in this embodiment, the standby detection switches 941, 942, and 943 constitute early detection means, and the 3R stop portion 933, the 7R stop portion 934, and the 15R stop portion 935, the 3R guide passage 743, and the 7R guide passage. 745, 15R guide passages 746 constitute a landing route (first and second landing routes).

  As described above, in this example, the type distribution device 741 in the type lottery area 408 is provided with the 3R stopping unit 933, the 7R stopping unit 934, and the 15R stopping unit 935 for stopping the game ball. It is possible to grasp which jackpot type is given depending on where it stops. In other words, it is determined that the game ball stopped at the 3R stop 933 is eventually detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736, and the game ball stopped at the 7R stop 934 is eventually connected to the 7R entrance detection switch 735. It is determined that the game ball stopped in the 15R stop 935 is detected by the 15R ball detection switch 734. In addition, for example, the game balls stopped at the 3R stop 933, the 7R stop 934, and the 15R stop 935 entered the 3R guide passage 743, the 7R guide passage 745, and the 15R guide passage 746 all at once. In this case, the 15R entry detection switch 734, the 7R entry detection switch 735, and the 3R entry detection switch 736 are configured such that the game ball is detected earlier as the detection that is more advantageous to the player is performed. Yes. Thereby, for example, when the game ball is stopped at all of the 3R stop portion 933, the 7R stop portion 934, and the 15R stop portion 935, the game ball stopped at the 15R stop portion 935 is changed to the 15R entrance detection switch. “15R jackpot” based on the detection at 734 is generated.

  For this reason, for example, the game ball stopped at the 15R stop 935 is guided to the 15R guide passage 746, but the game ball stopped at the 3R stop 933 or 7R stop 934 is 3R guide passage 743 or 7R. Since it was also guided to the guide passage 745, there is a possibility that the “15R jackpot” may not occur (the “3R jackpot” or the “7R jackpot”) may be avoided. Can do. Therefore, easy-to-understand playability is ensured such that the game ball may be stopped such that the 7R stop 934 is stopped by the 3R stop 933 and the 15R stop 935 is stopped by the 7R stop 934. It is possible to make the point of excitement (the highlight, the point of emphasis) clear.

  Furthermore, it becomes easier for the game balls to be stopped at the stop portions 934 and 935, which are more advantageous for the player, and the game balls are stopped at the 3R stop portion 933 when a lot of game balls enter the type lottery area 408. Since there is no need to be afraid of this, it is possible to associate a lottery game balls with the type lottery area 408, more fundamentally, into the specific area 401 and an advantage for the player. Accordingly, it is possible to eliminate a negative image of entering the game ball into the specific area 401, and to ensure the gameability of entering the specific area 401 as much as possible. Can be.

  In addition, each of the stopping portions 933, 934, and 935 is formed in a concave shape that can accommodate one game ball at a time. For this reason, the game balls stopped at the stop portions 933, 934, and 935 can be more reliably retained (positioned) at the stop portions 933, 934, and 935. For this reason, in a state where the game balls are stopped in the type sorting device 741, it is more accurately determined which guide balls 743, 745, and 746 the guided game balls are guided to. It becomes possible. Also, it is easier to recognize that the game ball is guided to the guide passages 743, 745, and 746 than the configuration in which the game ball enters the guide passages 743, 745, and 746 by a flow without staying. Can do. Furthermore, the game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746, and the state where the occurrence of the “15R big hit” is confirmed can be enjoyed, and the state in which the game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746 can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to secure the gameability such that the game ball is delighted to see how the game balls are stopped at the type distribution device 741 (the respective stopping portions 933, 934, 935).

  Further, in this embodiment, standby detection switches 941, 942, and 943 that can detect the game balls that are stopped at the respective stopping portions 933, 934, and 935 are provided. Therefore, in a state where the game ball is stopped at the stop portions 933, 934, 935, if the stop state is released, for example, the game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746 ("15R big hit" is It is possible to teach that the game ball is only guided to the 3R guide passage 743 (a “3R jackpot” occurs) at present. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the performance in the stopped state where the game balls are stopped in the type distribution device 741, and to improve the interest.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the 3R stop 933, the 7R stop 934, and the 15R stop 935 are arranged in this order from the upstream side in the type lottery area 408, and basically the game balls are stopped at the 3R stop 933. The game ball can reach the 7R stop 934 and stop by setting it to the state that the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop 933 and the 7R stop 934. Is made to reach the 15R stop 935 and stop. For this reason, by letting a plurality of game balls reach the type lottery area 408, it is possible to enjoy the state of stepping in an advantageous manner for the player. In addition, it is possible to grasp that the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop 933 or the 7R stop 934 as a good impression.

  In addition, the stationary rotating body 937 of the present embodiment example does not always move, but basically stops in a reference posture in which the discharge recess 938 faces downward, and the special entry detection switch 461 detects Start operation when done. And when it returns to the standard posture after one rotation, it stops. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball that has reached the type distribution device 741 passes through the type distribution device 741 without being substantially stopped, as in the case where the stationary rotating body 937 continues to operate. it can. Therefore, the real pleasure of enjoying the stopping state of the game ball to the type distribution device 741 can be more surely enjoyed.

  In this example, when a game ball enters the type lottery area 408 in a state where the game ball is not stopped at the 3R stop 933, the game ball enters the 3R stop 933 and enters the 3R When a game ball enters the type lottery area 408 while the game ball is stopped at the stop 933 and the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop 933, the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop 933. Over the ball (on the platform) to reach the 7R stop 934, enter the 7R stop 934, stop, and the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop 933 and the 7R stop 934 When a game ball enters the lottery area 408, the game ball gets over the game ball stopped at the 3R stop 933 and the 7R stop 934 (by using the platform) and reaches the 15R stop 935. However, even if the game ball is not stopped at the 3R stop 933, the game ball reaches the 7R stop 934 or the 15R stop 935. Then, it may be configured to enter and stop. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the game ball reaches the 7R stop 934 or the 15R stop 935 in the stopped state rather than the state in which the game ball is not stopped in the 3R stop 933. Therefore, it is possible to secure a gameability such as aiming to make a lot of game balls enter the specific area 401.

  (V) Next, a modified example of the type distribution device 741 shown in FIG. 46 will be described. Similar to the type distribution device 741 of FIG. 45, the type distribution device 741 of this embodiment example is provided with a distribution plate 951 adjacent to the start table 742. However, the jackpot types given based on the detection of the special ball detection switch 461 in this embodiment are only “15 round jackpot” and “8 round jackpot”, and the distribution board 951 has correspondingly corresponding to this. An upper stop 952 and a lower stop 953 are provided. In this embodiment as well, the upper stop portion 952 is on the upstream side, and the game ball can basically reach the lower stop portion 953 by stopping the game ball at the upper stop portion 952. However, even if the game ball is not stopped at the upper stop portion 952, the game ball may be configured to reach the lower stop portion 953. However, even if only one game ball enters the type lottery area 408, some kind of jackpot type is always determined.

  Below the sorting plate 951, a stopping shutter 954 is provided as a stopping means for stopping the game balls that have entered the upper stopping portion 952 and the lower stopping portion 953 at the upper stopping portion 952 and the lower stopping portion 953. Yes. The stationary shutter 954 extends in the horizontal direction, and is configured to be displaceable in the front-rear and horizontal directions between a projecting position that projects to a lower position of the distribution board 951 and an open position that immerses into the front surface of the game board 30. Yes. When the stop shutter 954 is in the protruding position, the type distribution device 741 that can stop the game ball at the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953 is stopped, and the stop shutter 954 is set to the open position. In this case, the game balls that have been stopped at the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953 are placed in the guidance state of the type distribution device 741 that is guided to the downstream side (a distributor 954 described later). The stationary shutter 954 is set to the open position, for example, 5.5 seconds after the detection of the special ball detection switch 461, and is set to the protruding position, for example, 0.4 seconds after the open position (big hit). During the state, it is always open position).

  A sorter 954 (sorting unit) is provided below the stationary shutter 954. The distributor 954 has the same configuration as that of the route distribution device 703 of the above embodiment, and includes a shaft portion 957 that is supported by the shaft pin 956 and a first wing portion 958 that protrudes leftward from the shaft portion 957. And a second wing portion 959 protruding rightward from the shaft portion 957, and has a bilaterally symmetric shape. The first guide surface 958a that is the upper surface of the first wing portion 958 is inclined downward toward the left side, and the second guide surface 959a that is the upper surface of the second wing portion 959 is inclined downward toward the right side. Although the distributor 954 is rotatably supported, when the external force is not applied, the first wing part 958 and the second wing part 959 are in a reference posture extending from the shaft part 957 to the left and right.

  Further, a first wing portion 958 (first guide surface 958a) is disposed immediately below the upper stop portion 952, and a second wing portion 959 (second guide surface 959a) is disposed immediately below the lower stop portion 953. Has been. In this example, when game balls are stopped at both the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953, these game balls are moved to the first wing portion 958 (first guide surface 958a) and the second wing portion 959 ( The second guide surface 959a) is simultaneously dropped to the (almost) left and right equal positions around the shaft portion 957. Thus, when game balls fall on the first wing part 958 and the second wing part 959 at the same time, the distributor 954 does not substantially rotate.

  A 15R guide passage 960 is provided on the left side of the first wing portion 958 (first guide surface 958a) and on the right side of the second wing portion 959 (second guide surface 959a). Further, an 8R guide passage 961 is provided below the distributor 954. In addition, each 15R guide passage 960 is provided with a 15R entrance detection switch 962 that detects a game ball guided to the 15R guide passage 960. Further, an 8R entrance detection switch 963 that detects a game ball guided to the 8R guide passage 961 is provided.

  Then, when the stop shutter 954 is brought into the open position from the state where the game ball is stopped in one of the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953, the sorter 954 is rotated by the weight of the game ball, and this is applied. The game ball is guided to the 8R guide passage 961. On the other hand, when the stop shutter 954 is set to the open position from the state where the game balls are stopped at both the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953, these game balls are the first wing portion 958 (first The guide surface 958a) and the second wing portion 959 (second guide surface 959a) are guided to the 15R guide passage 960.

  Further, an upper early detection switch 964 for detecting a game ball stopped at the upper stop 952 and a lower early detection switch 965 for detecting a game ball stopped at the lower stop 953 are provided. In this example, in the state where both the upper early detection switch 964 and the lower early detection switch 965 have been detected, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays that the winning of “15R jackpot” is rich, and the upper early detection. In a state where one of the switch 964 and the lower early detection switch 965 is detected and there is no possibility that the other will be detected, a display indicating that the winning of “8R jackpot” is rich on the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed. In the state where one of the upper early detection switch 964 and the lower early detection switch 965 is detected and the other may be detected, “15R jackpot” is won in the decorative symbol display device 42. Display (promotion reception display) indicating that there is a possibility.

  In this embodiment, the first wing portion 958 (first guide surface 958a) and the second wing portion 959 (second guide surface 959a) and the 15R guide when the game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 960 are provided. The passage 960 forms a second entrance route (in some cases, a second guide passage), and the first wing portion 958 (first guide surface 958a) or the second when guiding the game ball to the 8R guide passage 961 or the second The wing portion 959 (second guide surface 959a) and the 8R guide passage 961 constitute a first entrance route (in some cases, a first guide passage). Further, in the state where the game ball is stopped only in one of the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953, the upper stop portion 952 or the lower stop portion 953 corresponds to the first stop portion, and the upper stop portion 952 and In a state where game balls are stopped at both of the lower stop portions 953, the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953 correspond to the second stop portion. Incidentally, in this embodiment, since the game ball is not stopped at the lower stop portion 953 unless the game ball is stopped at the upper stop portion 952, the upper stop portion 952 is substantially the first stop portion. The lower stop 953 is the second stop.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the jackpot type is different depending on whether the game ball is stopped at both the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953 or only at one of them. Yes. Even in this configuration, the effect of allowing the type distribution device 741 to fully enjoy the stopping state of the game ball is exhibited. Further, in this example, when the game balls are stopped at both of the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953, both the game balls are guided to the 15R guide passage 960, while the game balls are guided to the 8R guide passage 961. Since it is configured not to be guided, the game ball is stopped at both the upper stop portion 952 and the lower stop portion 953, and a “15R jackpot” jackpot state that is more advantageous for the player is given. Can be more reliably associated with each other.

  (W) Next, a modified example of the type distribution device 741 shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b) will be described. The type sorting apparatus 741 of this example is provided with a substantially disk-shaped Kroon 971 that enters the type lottery area 408 and guides a game ball passing through the start table 742. The Kroon 971 is first guided by a game ball that has passed through the start base 742, and is positioned on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral portion 972 and the outer peripheral portion 972 where the game ball can circulate according to the momentum. Each of the retaining portions 974 is provided with an inner peripheral portion 973 arranged in a ring shape.

  In this example, the success / failure lottery area 407 is omitted, and a game ball that has entered the specific area 401 always enters the type lottery area 408, and depending on the behavior (winning place) of the game ball in the type lottery area 408, It is configured so that the state assignment and the jackpot type to be given are determined. That is, there is a possibility that three or more game balls may enter the type lottery area 408 in succession. In addition, the game ball is configured to reach the type lottery area 408 earlier when the game ball is guided to the special path 702 than when the game ball is guided to the normal path 701 by the route distribution device 703. It is good also as being done.

  Below the cruiser 971, a stopping shutter 954 is provided as stopping means for stopping the game ball that has entered the stopping portion 974 at the stopping portion 974. The stationary shutter 975 extends in the horizontal direction, and is configured to be displaceable back and forth and horizontally between a projecting position projecting to a lower position of the crew 971 and an open position immersing in the front surface of the game board 30. . When the stop shutter 975 is in the projecting position, the type distribution device 741 that can stop the game ball at the stop 974 is stopped, and when the stop shutter 975 is in the open position, the stop The game balls stopped at 974 are placed in the guidance state of the type distribution device 741 in which the game balls are guided downstream (the distribution unit 976 described later). The stationary shutter 975 is set to the open position, for example, 5.5 seconds after the detection of the special ball detection switch 461, and is set to the protruding position, for example, 0.4 seconds after the open position (big hit). During the state, it is always open position).

  Below the stationary shutter 975, a distributor 976 (distributor) is provided. The distributor 976 is configured to be rotatable so that the rotation axis is in the front-rear direction, and includes a shaft portion 977 disposed below the right portion of the clown 971 and a receiving plate portion 978 extending leftward from the shaft portion 977. And a reference position in which the receiving plate portion 978 extends in a substantially horizontal direction (slightly inclined downward toward the left side) and a maximum inclination position inclined by about 60 to 80 degrees downward from the reference position. It is configured to be displaceable. The distributor 976 is biased toward the reference position by a coil spring (not shown).

  At the left of the sorter 976, there are an escape path 979 in which the game ball is guided by the sorter 976 at or near the reference position, and a game ball by the sorter 976 at the maximum tilt position or near it. 15R guide passage 980 for guiding the game ball, and 8R guide passage 981 for guiding the game ball by the distributor 976 at an intermediate position between the reference position and the maximum tilt position. When a game ball is detected by the release detection switch 982 provided in the release passage 979, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19. When a game ball is detected by the 15R ball detection switch 983 provided in the 15R guide passage 980, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 and a big hit state of “15R big hit” is started. . When a game ball is detected by the 8R entrance detection switch 984 provided in the 8R guide passage 981, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 and a big hit state of “8R big hit” is started. .

  The 8R guide passage 981 is longer than the disengagement passage 979, and the 15R guide passage 980 is longer than the 8R guide passage 981. Accordingly, the game ball guided to the 8R guide passage 981 and the 15R guide passage 980 is detected by the 8R entrance detection switch 984 and 15R before the game ball guided to the release passage 979 is detected by the release detection switch 982. The game ball guided to the 15R guide passage 980 is detected before the game ball detected by the entrance detection switch 983 and guided to the 8R guide passage 981 is detected by the 8R entrance detection switch 984. The switch 983 is configured to be detected.

  Then, from the state where the game balls are stopped at the eight stop portions 974, when the stop shutter 975 is set to the open position, all of the game balls stopped at the respective stop portions 974 are assigned to the reference positions. It will fall into the vessel 976. In the present embodiment, depending on the number and arrangement of the game balls stopped at the eight stop portions 974, it is sorted out whether the game ball is guided to the release passage 979, the 15R guide passage 980, or the 8R guide passage 981. It is like that. That is, when only one game ball is stopped at the stop portion 974 and the stop shutter 975 is in the open position, the distributor 976 is substantially rotated and displaced even if the game ball falls on the distributor 976. Instead, the game ball is guided to the escape passage 979. If the stop shutter 975 is in the open position while the game ball is stopped at all of the eight stop portions 974, when the game ball falls on the sorter 976, the sorter 976 rotates to the maximum open position. Displaced and at least one of the game balls is guided to the 15R guide passage 980. In other cases, the more the number of game balls placed on the stationary shutter 975, or the more the game balls fall locally (at the front end side of the receiving plate 978) even with the same number of balls, the distributor 976 Tends to be greatly inclined toward the maximum open position.

  In addition, an early detection switch 985 for detecting each game ball stopped at each stop 974 is provided. In the present example, the decorative symbol display device 42 performs a suggestion display such as the possibility of a jackpot state being given or what type of jackpot state is to be given based on the detection information of the early detection switch 985. It is like that. That is, when eight game balls are stopped in the Kroon 971, “15R jackpot expectation degree max” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and one or two game balls are stopped. Is displayed as “Stay Still” and when 3 or 4 game balls are parked, it is displayed as “Tone” and 5 to 7 game balls are parked. In this case, “can go still” is displayed. In addition, not only the number information of the stopped game balls but also the arrangement information may be taken into consideration, and the suggestion display may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the entrance route is constituted by the sorter 976 together with the detachment passage 979, the 15R guide passage 980, and the 8R guide passage 981. Further, when the game ball stopped at the stop portion 974 is guided to the 15R guide passage 980 or the 8R guide passage 981 advantageous to the player, the stop portion 974 where the game ball is stopped results in Corresponds to the second stop.

  As described above, depending on the number and arrangement of the game balls that are stopped by the type distribution device 741 (Kroon 971) in the stopped state, the stopped game balls are released from the release passages 979, 15R guide passages 980, and 8R guides. Which of the passages 981 is to be guided is determined. That is, the player plays the game with the goal of stopping more game balls. Therefore, the above-described effect is achieved more reliably, such as allowing the player to enjoy a game such as having as many game balls as possible enter the specific area 401.

  In addition, since the early detection switch 985 is provided corresponding to each of the eight stopping portions 974, it is possible to reliably grasp the number of game balls that are stopped. Then, the game ball can be guided to the 15R guide passage 980, or the number of game balls that are stopped to generate a big hit state can be produced. The improvement etc. can be aimed at.

  In the above (u), (v), (w), the bottom of the stopping part is removed, and the game ball stopped at the stopping part is guided to the downstream side (guidance path). However, for example, the stop portion of the distribution plate is configured as a bottomed concave portion, and the distribution plate is configured to be rotatable by driving means. You may comprise so that the game ball stopped by the stop part may be guided downstream by rotating a part to the side which becomes a downward direction.

[Appendix]
The technical idea that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described below.

  A. Conventionally, for example, a pachinko machine is known as a kind of gaming machine. The pachinko machine is configured such that a game is played using a game ball, the game ball is provided with a movable game area, and the game ball launched by the launching unit is guided to the game area.

  Further, the pachinko machine is provided with specific ball entry means having a specific area where a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and the game ball enters the start ball entry means provided in the game area. When the specific ball entry means is in an open state that allows game balls to enter the specific area, and a game ball that has entered the specific area enters the special ball entry means in the same area, In some cases, a special gaming state advantageous to the player occurs (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

  In addition, in order to add interest to the behavior of the game ball from when the game ball enters the specific area until it reaches the special ball entry means, the game ball that entered the specific area enters the special ball entry means. There are some that are provided with a sorting means that randomly assigns them to those that do not enter the ball. Furthermore, the first guidance route (normal route) that can guide the game balls that have entered the specific area to the special ball entry means, and the game balls that have entered the specific area while interposing the distribution means, etc. Some have a second guide route (special route) that can guide to special entry means with higher probability than the first guide route.

  By the way, when a plurality of game balls enter a specific area almost simultaneously, in a situation where it may be advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the special entry means However, there is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the game balls are in a relationship of interfering with each other (for example, at the entrance to the second guidance route) and cannot enter the second guidance route. is there. As a result, when a plurality of game balls enter the specific area at the same time, contrary to the player's expectation, compared to the case where one game ball enters the specific area one by one, There is a concern that the expectation of entering a special special entry means may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and its purpose is to advance a game more advantageously and more reliably by bringing a plurality of game balls into a specific area. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can handle the above.

Means A-0-a. A game area where game balls launched by the launching means are guided; and
In a gaming machine provided with a specific entry means having a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
The specific entry means is
A first ball entry means (non-special ball entry means) in which a game ball entered in the specific area is configured to be able to enter, and a first grant is performed when the game ball enters;
A second ball entry means (a second ball entry means (2) that is configured to allow a game ball that has entered the specific area to enter, and that when the game ball enters, a second grant that is more advantageous to the player than the first grant is performed. Special entry means),
A guide passage for guiding a game ball that has entered the specific area to the first entrance means or the second entrance means;
The guide passage is
A first guidance route capable of guiding a game ball entered in the specific area to the second entry means;
A second guidance route capable of guiding a game ball that has entered the specific area to the second entry means with a higher probability than the first guidance route;
At a branching point between the first guidance route and the second guidance route, route distribution means for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific area to the first guidance route or the second guidance route is provided,
The route distribution means is
A state changeable between a first guidance state for guiding the game ball to the first guidance route and a second guidance state for guiding the game ball to the second guidance route;
The game ball can be guided in the first guidance state by guiding one game ball to the route distribution means,
A gaming machine configured to be able to guide a game ball in the second guidance state by guiding a plurality of game balls to the route distribution means.

  According to the means A-0-a, there is provided route distribution means for allowing a plurality of game balls to enter the specific area so that all of the plurality of game balls can be guided to the second guide route. ing. For this reason, it is possible to match a plurality of game balls entering a specific area together with an increase in the expectation of entering a special ball entry means. Since the balls are put together, the player's expectation that it will work favorably for entering the game balls into the special entry means, and actually a plurality of game balls are guided to the second guidance route By doing so, it is possible to match the expectation of entering the special entry means. Therefore, even if a plurality of game balls enter the specific area together, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it does not contribute to the generation expectation degree of the special entry means, or rather decreases, and the specific area can be avoided. On the other hand, it is possible to derive the behavior of the game ball that meets the player's expectation that the expectation degree of occurrence of the special ball entry means is improved by entering a plurality of game balls together.

  It should be noted that “when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, a first privilege is granted, and when a game ball enters the second ball entry means, the player is more than the first privilege. It is good also as giving the advantageous (beneficial) 2nd privilege. Examples of the “first privilege” mentioned here include a case where a first specified number of game values are given, a state where it is easy to enter a specific entry means, and the like. Further, “when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, a first advantageous state is given, and when a game ball enters the second ball entry means, the game is more effective than the first advantage state. It is also possible that a second advantageous state that is advantageous to the person is given ". The “first advantageous state” mentioned here is not necessarily limited to the case where a state advantageous to the player is given, and the current state is maintained or is disadvantageous than the current state because the first advantageous state is given. This also includes the case of transition to a state.

Means A-0-b-1. The route distribution means is configured to be changeable between a reference posture for guiding the game ball to the second guide route and a change posture for guiding the game ball to the first guide route,
The gaming machine according to means A-0-a, wherein the reference posture is maintained by game balls coming into contact with specific places existing at a plurality of places of the route distribution means.

  According to the means A-0-b, in order to maintain the reference position of the route distribution means, it is necessary to make a plurality of game balls enter the specific area and reach the route distribution means. Therefore, it is possible to further ensure the gaming property that it is more advantageous for the player to enter a plurality of balls than to enter one gaming ball in the specific area. Furthermore, it is possible to add an interesting feature that the guidance destination of the game ball changes depending on the balance of the route distribution means when guiding the game ball.

Means A-0-b-2. The specific location comprises a first specific location and a second specific location,
A first introduction passage for guiding a game ball that has entered the specific area to the first specific place;
A gaming machine according to means A-0-b-1, further comprising a second introduction passage for guiding a game ball that has entered the specific area to the second specific location.

  According to the means A-0-b-2, it is possible to increase the chance that the game balls are simultaneously brought into contact with the first specific place and the second specific place, or to play the game balls with respect to the first specific place and the second specific place. The position to be guided (placed) can be determined as a suitable position. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance that all of the plurality of game balls that have entered the specific area are guided to the second guidance route.

Means A-0-b-3. First entry detecting means for detecting a game ball moving in the first introduction passage;
A gaming machine according to means A-0-b-2, further comprising second entry detecting means for detecting a game ball moving in the second introduction passage.

  According to the means A-0-b-3, it is possible to perform an effect such as teaching the player a moment that is pleasing to the player such that two game balls are simultaneously guided to the first specific location and the second specific location. it can.

Means A-0-c. The route distribution means is configured to be changeable between a reference posture for guiding the game ball to the first guide route and a change posture for guiding the game ball to the second guide route,
The means A-0-a is characterized in that the route distribution means is configured to be capable of changing its posture from the reference posture to the changed posture when receiving a load of a specific amount or more from a game ball. Game machines.

  According to the means A-0-c, in order to change the posture of the route distribution unit to the changed posture, it is necessary to cause a plurality of game balls to enter the specific area and reach the route distribution unit. Therefore, it is possible to further ensure the gaming property that it is more advantageous for the player to enter a plurality of balls than to enter one gaming ball in the specific area. Furthermore, by supporting a large number of game balls by the route distribution means, it is possible to add the fun that the guidance destination of the game balls changes to a better one.

Means A-1. A game area where game balls launched by the launching means are guided; and
In a gaming machine provided with a specific entry means having a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
The specific entry means is
A special ball entry means configured to allow a game ball that has entered the specific area to enter, and a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters;
Non-special entry means for entering game balls other than game balls entering the special entry means among the game balls entering the specific area;
A guide passage that guides the game ball that has entered the specific area to the special entry means or the non-special entry means,
The guide passage is
A first guidance route capable of guiding a game ball that has entered the specific area to the special ball entry means;
A second guidance route capable of guiding the game ball entered in the specific area to the special entry means with higher probability than the first guidance route;
At a branching point between the first guidance route and the second guidance route, route distribution means for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific area to the first guidance route or the second guidance route is provided,
The route distribution means is
When one game ball is distributed by guiding one game ball to the route distribution means, the one game ball is guided to the first guide route,
A plurality of game balls are guided to the route distribution means at the same time, so that when a plurality of game balls are distributed at the same time, the plurality of game balls can be guided to the second guide route. A gaming machine characterized by being made.

  According to the means A-1, when a plurality of game balls enter the specific area almost simultaneously, route distribution means is provided that can guide all of the plurality of game balls to the second guide route. Yes. For this reason, it is possible to match a plurality of game balls entering a specific area together with an increase in the expectation of entering a special ball entry means. Since the balls are put together, the player's expectation that it will work favorably for entering the game balls into the special entry means, and actually a plurality of game balls are guided to the second guidance route By doing so, it is possible to match the expectation of entering the special entry means. Therefore, even if a plurality of game balls enter the specific area together, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it does not contribute to the generation expectation degree of the special entry means, or rather decreases, and the specific area can be avoided. On the other hand, it is possible to derive the behavior of the game ball that meets the player's expectation that the expectation degree of occurrence of the special ball entry means is improved by entering a plurality of game balls together.

  It should be noted that “the route distribution means guides the game ball to the first guidance route when one game ball is distributed”.

Means A-2. The route distribution means is
A shaft portion pivotally supported, and
A first wing portion protruding from the shaft portion toward one side of the shaft portion;
A second wing portion protruding from the shaft portion toward the other side of the shaft portion,
The first wing portion and the second wing portion are balanced in a reference posture in which both sides protrude from the shaft portion, and upper surfaces of the first wing portion and the second wing portion in the reference posture are configured. A guiding surface (and inclined downward toward both sides) communicates with the second guiding route;
The game ball that has entered the specific area is configured to be guided by the guide surface of the first wing part or the second wing part,
When the game ball is guided to the first wing portion or the second wing portion, the route distribution means is rotated by the force received from the game ball, and the route distribution means is rotated to rotate the guide. The surface communicates with the first guide route, and the game ball is guided to the first guide route,
When the game balls are guided almost simultaneously to the first wing and the second wing, the balance between the weight on the first wing and the weight on the second wing is obtained. )) The reference wing is maintained (rotation of the route distribution unit is suppressed) and the reference posture is maintained (rotation of the route distribution unit is avoided). The gaming machine according to means A-1, wherein the game balls guided to the second wing part are respectively guided to the second guide route.

  According to the means A-2, it is possible to realize a configuration in which a plurality (two) of game balls are simultaneously guided to the second guide route while adopting a relatively simple configuration. Further, for example, in the route distribution means, it is possible to prevent a problem that occurs based on the deterioration of the elastic body, compared to the case where an elastic body such as a spring or rubber is used. Furthermore, there is no need to provide a driving means for driving the route distribution means, and the configuration and control can be simplified and downsized. In addition, compared to a configuration in which the route is switched depending on whether or not there are a plurality of game balls by using detection means and drive means for detecting game balls, there is a suspicion that makes the player feel distrustful. Can be reduced, and fairness can be promoted.

Means A-3. The entrance opening that is the entrance to the specific area of the specific entrance means, and a pair of blade members that open and close the entrance opening, respectively,
A game ball that has entered the specific area through the first entrance opening of the entrance opening is guided to the first wing (dropped to the guide surface of the first wing). 1 introduction passage,
A game ball that has entered the specific area through the second entrance opening of the entrance opening is guided to the second wing (dropped to the guide surface of the second wing). The gaming machine according to means A-2, further comprising two introduction passages.

  According to the means A-3, the opportunity to contact the game sphere simultaneously with the first wing part and the second wing part is increased, or the game sphere is guided (loaded) to the first wing part and the second wing part. ) Position can be set to a suitable position. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance that all of the plurality of game balls that have entered the specific area are guided to the second guidance route. In addition, it is possible to impart a game property such that a game ball is fired in both the left and right entrance openings so that the game ball is fired (aimed and desired).

Means A-4. First entry detecting means for detecting a game ball moving in the first introduction passage;
A second entry detecting means for detecting a game ball moving in the second introduction passage,
In the process of determining whether or not the first entry detection means and the second entry detection means are detected, either of the first entry detection means and the second entry detection means is confirmed to be detected, or either The gaming machine according to means A-3, wherein different effects are derived when only one of the detections is confirmed.

  According to the means A-4, the player can recognize and enjoy the moment that the player is happy that two game balls are simultaneously guided to the first wing part and the second wing part of the route distribution means. it can.

Means A-5. The route distribution means is
A shaft portion pivotally supported so that the central axis extends in the left-right direction;
A front piece projecting forward from the shaft and disposed in the specific region;
A rear piece projecting rearward from the shaft,
Among the route distribution means, the weight on the front piece part side than the shaft part is configured to be lighter than the weight on the rear piece part side than the shaft part,
The front piece portion closes the second guide route, and a guide surface constituting an upper surface of the front piece portion communicates with the first guide route (and is inclined downward toward the first guide route side). ) Is in equilibrium with the reference posture,
The game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means is configured to be guided by the guide surface of the front piece,
When a predetermined number or more of game balls are placed on the front piece of the route distribution unit in the reference posture, the front piece of the route distribution unit is more than the front piece. The weight of the part side becomes heavier than the weight of the rear piece part side than the shaft part, and the route distribution means rotates so that the front piece part tilts downward, and the route distribution means Is rotated, the guide surface communicates with the second guide route, and the game ball is guided to the second guide route,
When the number of game balls placed on the front piece of the route distribution unit in the reference posture is less than the prescribed number, the weight of the route distribution unit closer to the front piece than the shaft is included. However, the weight of the rear part is lighter than the shaft, the reference posture of the route distribution means is maintained (rotation is avoided), and the game ball is guided to the first guide route. The gaming machine according to means A-1, wherein

  According to the means A-5, it is possible to realize a configuration in which a plurality of game balls are simultaneously guided to the second guide route while adopting a relatively simple configuration. Further, for example, in the route distribution means, it is possible to prevent a problem that occurs based on the deterioration of the elastic body, compared to the case where an elastic body such as a spring or rubber is used. Furthermore, there is no need to provide a driving means for driving the route distribution means, and the configuration and control can be simplified and downsized.

Means A-6. The specific entry means is
Special entry detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special entry means (and
A non-special entry detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the non-special entry means),
When the special ball detection means detects a game ball (in the special game state or in a state other than a state where the right to generate the special game state has already been obtained), the special game state In gaming machines that are granted the right to generate
A special lottery area for entering the special entry means and guiding the game balls detected by the special entry detection means,
In a state where game balls exist in the type lottery area, another game ball can enter the special ball entry means and enter the type lottery area,
In the type lottery area,
A first type entry means capable of entering a game ball and a second type entry means;
First type entry detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the first type entry means;
A second type entry detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the second type entry means,
When a game ball is detected by the first type entry detection means (in a state other than the special game state or the state of the special game state to which the right to be generated is already determined). In the state) the type of the special gaming state to which the right to be generated is granted is the first special gaming state,
When a game ball is detected by the second type entry detection means (in a state other than the special game state or the state of the special game state to which the right to be generated is already determined). In the state), the type of the special gaming state to which the right to be generated is granted is a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state,
The first type determination time until the game ball that has entered the type lottery area is detected by the first type entrance detection means,
Means A-1 to A characterized in that the game balls that have entered the type lottery area are configured to be longer than the second type determination time until the second type entry detection means detects the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of -5.

  According to the means A-6, basically the same effect as the means B-1 described later is exhibited. Further, when the configuration of the means A-1 is adopted, when a plurality of game balls enter the specific area almost simultaneously, all of these game balls are easily guided to the second guide route. There is a high possibility that a plurality of game balls enter the special ball entry means in succession. For this reason, in this configuration, by adopting the configuration of the means A-6 in which it is not wasted that a plurality of game balls continuously enter the special entry means, a plurality of special entry means are provided in the special entry means. Even if game balls enter continuously, the effect of suppressing the decrease in interest caused by being wasted or lost is more effectively achieved.

  B. Conventionally, for example, a pachinko machine is known as a kind of gaming machine. The pachinko machine is configured such that a game is played using a game ball, the game ball is provided with a movable game area, and the game ball launched by the launching unit is guided to the game area.

  Further, the pachinko machine is provided with specific ball entry means having a specific area where a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and the game ball enters the start ball entry means provided in the game area. When the specific ball entry means is in an open state that allows game balls to enter the specific area, and a game ball that has entered the specific area enters the special ball entry means in the same area, In some cases, a special gaming state advantageous to the player occurs (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

  By the way, during the special game state or when the special game state right is obtained, even if the game ball enters the special ball entry means, a further special game state is given. Not. In other words, even if a relatively rare phenomenon such as a plurality of consecutive game balls entering the special ball entry means occurs, the right to be granted a special game state is only once, and the player has lost. I am concerned that I may have the impression of being a waste. As a result, there is a concern that a situation may arise in which the player is not happy to let go even though a favorable situation has been reached for the player, such as a case where a special game state is given.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and its purpose is to suppress a decrease in interest caused by a plurality of game balls continuously entering special ball entry means. It is to provide a game machine that can be used.

Means B-0-a. A game area where game balls launched by the launching means are guided; and
Specific entry means having a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
The specific entry means is
In a state where a game ball is present in the specific area, another game ball can enter the specific area,
In the specific area,
A first type entry means capable of entering a game ball and a second type entry means;
First type entry detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the first type entry means;
A second type entry detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the second type entry means,
When a game ball is detected by the first type entry detection means, a first grant is made,
When a game ball is detected by the second type entry detection means, a second grant that is more advantageous to the player than the first grant is performed,
The first type determination time until the game ball that has entered the specific area is detected by the first type entrance detection means,
A gaming machine configured to be longer than a second type determination time until a game ball entering the specific area is detected by the second type entrance detection means.

  The first privilege is given when a game ball is detected by the first type entrance detection means, and the first privilege is given when the game ball is detected by the second type entrance detection means. It is good also as giving the 2nd privilege more advantageous (beneficial) for a player than. Examples of the “first privilege” mentioned here include a case where a first specified number of game values are given, a state where it is easy to enter a specific entry means, and the like. Further, “when a game ball is detected by the first type of incoming ball detection means, a first advantageous state is given, and when a game ball is detected by the second type of incoming ball detection means, the first type A second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state may be given ". The “first advantageous state” mentioned here is not necessarily limited to the case where a state advantageous to the player is given, and the current state is maintained or is disadvantageous than the current state because the first advantageous state is given. This also includes the case of transition to a state.

Means B-0-b. In the specific area,
A first guide passage for bringing a game ball to the first type entry means;
A second guide passage for bringing the game ball to the second type entrance means;
Type distribution means for guiding a game ball that has reached a predetermined position in the specific area to the first guide path or the second guide path is provided,
The entrance of the first guide passage is arranged on the upstream side of the moving path of the game ball in the specific area from the entrance of the second guide passage,
The gaming machine according to means B-0-a, wherein the first guide passage is configured so that a time required for the game ball to pass is longer than that of the second guide passage.

Means B-0-c. Covering means arranged to cover the front of the first guide passage is provided,
The gaming machine according to means B-0-b, wherein the visibility of the game ball changes before and after the game ball enters the first guide passage.

  Means B-0-d. According to means B-0-b or means B-0-c, an entrance display portion showing each entrance of the first guide passage and the second guide passage is provided so as to be visible from the front. Gaming machine.

Means B-1. A game area where game balls launched by the launching means are guided; and
Specific entry means having a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
The specific entry means is
Special entry means that allows a game ball entered in the specific area to enter,
(Non-special entry means for entering game balls other than game balls entering the special entry means out of the game balls entering the specific area)
Special entry detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special entry means (and
A non-special entry detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the non-special entry means),
When a game ball is detected by the special ball detection means, it is advantageous for the player (in a special game state or in a state other than a state where the right to generate the special game state has already been obtained, ) In gaming machines that are granted the right to generate special gaming states,
A special lottery area for entering the special entry detection means and guiding the game balls detected by the special entry detection means,
In a state where game balls exist in the type lottery area, another game ball can enter the special ball entry means and enter the type lottery area,
In the type lottery area,
A first type entry means capable of entering a game ball and a second type entry means;
First type entry detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the first type entry means;
A second type entry detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the second type entry means,
When a game ball is detected by the first type entry detection means (in a state other than the special game state or the state of the special game state to which the right to be generated is already determined). In the state) the type of the special gaming state to which the right to be generated is granted is the first special gaming state,
When a game ball is detected by the second type entry detection means (in a state other than the special game state or the state of the special game state to which the right to be generated is already determined). In the state), the type of the special gaming state to which the right to be generated is granted is a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state,
The first type determination time until the game ball that has entered the type lottery area is detected by the first type entrance detection means,
A gaming machine configured to be longer than a second type determination time until a game ball that has entered the type lottery area is detected by the second type entrance detection means.

  According to the means B-1, the game ball that has entered the special entry means is not discharged to the outside of the game area (specific area) after being detected by the special entry detection means. It is configured to enter a part of the type lottery area. Then, an analog lottery (type lottery) is performed for determining the type of the special game state such as which of the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means the game ball enters. It has become. For this reason, when a game ball continuously enters the special ball entry means, the special game state to be given corresponds to the game ball first detected by the special ball detection means among the game balls passed continuously. However, it is possible to use all of the plurality of game balls that have entered the special ball entry means almost continuously in the subsequent type lottery.

  Furthermore, the first type determination time until the game ball that has entered the type lottery area is detected by the first type incoming ball detecting means that triggers the occurrence of the first special game state is more than the first special game state. It is configured to be longer than the second type determination time until it is detected by the second type entrance detection means that is an opportunity for the generation of the second special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. For this reason, for example, among the plurality of game balls that have successively entered the special ball entry means, the preceding game ball goes to the first type ball entry means, and the subsequent game ball goes to the second type ball entry means. Even in this case, it is possible to cause the subsequent game ball to enter the second type entrance means first, and to generate the second special game state that is more advantageous for the player. Therefore, the subsequent game balls can be utilized more reliably. As a result, it is possible to suppress feelings such as a player's loss and wastefulness for consecutively entering a plurality of game balls into the special ball entry means, and also to suppress a decrease in interest caused by it. it can.

Means B-2. In the type lottery area,
A first guide passage for bringing a game ball to the first type entry means;
A second guide passage for bringing the game ball to the second type entrance means;
Type distribution means for guiding game balls that have entered the type lottery area to the first guide path or the second guide path is provided,
The entrance of the first guide passage is arranged on the upstream side of the moving path of the game ball in the type lottery area than the entrance of the second guide passage,
The gaming machine according to means B-1, wherein the first guide passage is configured so that a time required for a game ball to pass is longer than that of the second guide passage.

  According to the means B-2, the game balls that entered the type lottery area were not guided by the type distribution means to the first type entry means (the “sieving” corresponding to the first type entry means was not dropped) In this case, the game ball is guided to the second type entrance means. In other words, it is possible to expect excitement in the game by bringing the player into the second type entry means that is advantageous to the player later (so that the player who remains until the end has a good result). it can.

  In addition, such a configuration is adopted in which the entrance of the first guide passage and the second guide passage that can be expected to generate a special gaming state more advantageous to the player is arranged on the downstream side. For example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area in succession, even if the preceding game ball is guided to the second guide passage side by the type distribution means, the subsequent game ball is classified. When guided to the first guide passage side by the means, the subsequent game ball reaches the first guide passage earlier.

  In this regard, according to the present means, the first guide passage is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass is longer than that of the second guide passage (the distance is long, the angle is loose, etc.). Therefore, for example, despite the fact that the preceding game ball is guided to the second guide passage, the subsequent game ball is guided to the first guide passage, and the preceding game ball is the second type entrance means. Prior to entering the ball, it is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which the subsequent game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the first special game state occurs.

  The second guide passage only needs to have a shorter time required for the game ball to pass than the first guide passage. For example, the second guide passage enters the second type entrance means directly from the type distribution means (second setup). And the second guide passage in which the distance of the guide passage is zero) is also included. Further, in order to increase the time required for the game ball to pass through the first guide passage, it is conceivable to increase the movement distance of the game ball required to pass through the first guide passage. In addition to the configuration that makes the game ball longer, for example, a delay means such that the game ball moves forward or backward several times in the same place, or the game ball moves forward, and the momentum of the game ball is temporarily stopped to take a relatively long time. A configuration may be adopted in which delay means for guiding to the next place is installed in the first guide passage. By the way, such delay means may be installed in the second guide passage, but in that case, the time required for the game ball to pass through the second guide passage is shorter than the time required for the game ball to pass through the first guide passage. Install something that will not be long.

Means B-3. An early detection means for detecting a game ball moving in the first guide path;
The means according to means B-2, wherein when the detection by the early detection means is performed, a preceding opening effect that suggests that the first special gaming state is started can be derived. Gaming machine.

  The game ball that has entered the first guide passage is confirmed to enter the first type entrance means, but the passing time of the game ball in the first guide passage is longer than that in the second guide passage. Due to the configuration, there is a relatively long time lag between the time when the game ball enters the first guide path and the time when the game ball enters the first type entry means (until it is detected by the first type entry detection means). It is possible that this will occur. In this case, for example, when a game ball enters the special entry means in a single shot and further enters the first guide passage, it is determined that the first special game state will occur at this time (player) However, since it is not in the second special gaming state, it may be a little discouraged), but it takes a relatively long time for the game ball to pass through the first guide passage, and the first It can be considered that a special gaming state is not started.

  In this regard, according to the means B-3, a leading opening effect is derived that suggests that the first special gaming state is started when the game ball is detected by the early detection means installed in the first guide passage. Such a configuration can eliminate such a concern. Therefore, it takes too much time (there is no reaction) from the fact that the occurrence of the first special gaming state is determined until the first special gaming state is started, and the tempo of the game deteriorates, Situations such as a decline in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, unlike the opening effect performed as part of the special gaming state, the preceding opening effect is not included in the first special gaming state (although it looks the same, it is a pseudo opening effect), The first special game state is not started when the detection by the early detection means is performed, but the first special game state is started when the detection by the first entrance detection means is performed.

  Further, “when the detection by the early detection means is performed, an indeterminate element determination process for determining whether or not a game ball other than the game ball for which the detection has been performed exists in the specific area; When a negative determination is made in the deterministic element determination process, it corresponds to the entry into the first type entry means guided by the first guide path provided with the early detection means in which the game ball is detected It may be configured to be able to execute a preceding opening process for deriving a preceding opening effect that teaches that the first special gaming state is started. In this case, before the game ball detected by the early detection means is detected by the first type entrance detection means, another game ball is added to the first type entrance detection means or the second type entrance detection means. By being detected, it is possible to avoid a situation in which there is a contradiction between the mode of the preceding opening effect and the type of the special gaming state that actually occurs, and the first special gaming state occurs in the preceding opening effect. Can be taught. In addition, when the type of the special game state is not taught in the preceding opening effect (when only one of the first special game state and the second special game state is taught), such inconvenience is Although it does not occur, it is possible to improve performance and to give the player a sense of security if it is configured to be able to teach the type of special gaming state.

Means B-4. The first special gaming state includes a first opening pattern in which an opening effect is taught for a first time to teach that the first special gaming state is started, and a second time in which the opening effect is shorter than the first time. There is a second opening pattern that is performed for a time or the opening effect is omitted,
When the first type entry detection means is detected and the first special gaming state is generated, if the preceding opening effect is derived, the second opening pattern is selected. The gaming machine according to Means B-3, which is characterized.

  According to the means B-4, when the preceding opening effect is being performed, the opening effect can be prevented from becoming too long by further performing the opening effect for the first time. Accordingly, it is possible to more reliably avoid problems such as a deterioration in game tempo.

Means B-5. An entry detecting means for detecting all the game balls that have entered the specific area (immediately after) on the upstream side of the special entry means and the non-special entry means;
The number of game balls in the specific area is configured to be countable, and a value is added based on detection by the entry detection means, and the non-special entry detection means, the early detection means, and the second type The gaming machine according to means B-3 or B-4, further comprising first counting means for subtracting a value based on detection by the entrance detection means.

  According to the means B-5, for example, it is determined whether or not a ball clogging has occurred, or whether or not there is a game ball in addition to the game ball detected by the early detection means in the specific area. Can be discriminated. Therefore, it is possible to perform error processing due to ball clogging, improve the accuracy of the preceding opening effect, increase the amount of information of the preceding opening effect, and improve the game performance and performance. .

  Means B-6. When the early detection means is detected, based on the value of the first count means, the downstream side of the entry detection means, the non-special ball detection means, the early detection means, and the first It is determined whether or not a game ball is present in an area upstream of the two-type entrance detection means, and when it is determined that it does not exist, the preceding opening effect is derived, and when it is determined that it exists, There is provided a promotion reception state teaching means for teaching that the special game state type has not yet been determined (there is still a possibility of allowing a game ball to enter the second guide passage). A gaming machine according to means B-5, characterized in that.

  According to the means B-6, for example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area and the preceding game ball enters the first guide passage, the first special game state still occurs. The player can be surely recognized that the second special gaming state remains to be generated unless a subsequent game ball has entered the first guide passage without being determined. it can. Therefore, the gameability can be understood more reliably, and when the situation as in the above example occurs, the behavior of the subsequent game ball, the game ball continuously entering the type lottery area, etc. Can have a stronger interest.

  Means B-7. The number of game balls in the specific area is configured to be countable, and a value is added based on detection by the early detection means, and a value is subtracted based on detection by the first type entrance detection means. A gaming machine according to any one of means B-3 to B-6, further comprising: 2 counting means.

  According to the means B-7, for example, it can be determined whether or not ball clogging has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to perform error processing due to ball clogging, improve the accuracy of the preceding opening effect, increase the amount of information of the preceding opening effect, and improve the game performance and performance. .

Means B-8. The specific entry means includes a guide passage for guiding a game ball entered in the specific area to the special entry means or the non-special entry means,
The guide passage is
A first guidance route capable of guiding a game ball that has entered the specific area to the special ball entry means;
A second guidance route capable of guiding the game ball entered in the specific area to the special entry means with higher probability than the first guidance route;
At a branching point between the first guidance route and the second guidance route, route distribution means for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific area to the first guidance route or the second guidance route is provided,
The route distribution means is
When one game ball is distributed by guiding one game ball to the route distribution means, the one game ball is guided to the first guide route,
A plurality of game balls are guided to the route distribution means at the same time, so that when a plurality of game balls are distributed at the same time, the plurality of game balls can be guided to the second guide route. A gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-7, wherein

  According to the means B-8, basically the same function and effect as those of the means A-1 are achieved. In addition, when adopting the configuration of the means B-8, when a plurality of game balls enter the specific area almost simultaneously, these game balls are all easily guided to the second guide route, Eventually, there is a high possibility that a plurality of game balls continuously enter the special entry means. For this reason, in such a configuration, by adopting the configuration of means B-1 in which it is not wasted that a plurality of game balls continuously enter the special entry means, a plurality of games are added to the special entry means. Even if a ball enters continuously, the effect of suppressing the decrease in interest caused by being wasted or lost is more effectively achieved.

Means B-9. Covering means is provided so as to cover the front of the first guide passage (and reduce the visibility of the first guide passage),
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-8, wherein the visibility of the game ball changes before and after the game ball enters the first guide passage.

  According to the means B-9, the entrance of the first guide passage can be regarded as the entrance of the first type entry means. Therefore, basically, it is possible to make it easier to understand the premise of gaming that the first special gaming state is generated when entering the entrance of the first guide passage. In addition, by visually recognizing the first guide passage having a shape that delays the game ball, it is possible to prevent the designability from being deteriorated and the type lottery area from being complicated.

Means B-10. A first guide path for bringing the game ball moving in the specific area to the first type entry means;
In a configuration comprising a second guide passage that allows the game ball moving in the specific area to reach the second type entry means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-9, wherein an entrance display portion indicating each entrance of the first guide passage and the second guide passage is provided so as to be visible from the front. .

  According to the means B-10, the location of the entrance of the first guide passage and the second guide passage is clarified, and the gameability such as which of the first guide passage and the second guide passage the game ball enters is easier to understand. can do. The entrance display unit may be configured to be capable of changing the form based on the detection information of the early detection means. In this case, it is possible to make it easier to understand whether or not the game ball has entered the corresponding entrance route.

Means B-11. An entry detecting means for detecting all the game balls that have entered the specific area (immediately after) on the upstream side of the special entry means and the non-special entry means;
Means B-1 to B characterized by comprising detection history storage means for accumulating and storing detection information of the entry detection means, the first type entry detection means, and the second type entry detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of -10.

  According to the means B-11, since the behavior history of the game ball in the specific area is left more clearly, a trouble of where the game ball has entered between the player and the game hall occurs and becomes complicated. You can avoid that. The detection history storage means may be configured to accumulate and store the detection information of the early detection means. In this case, it is possible to more reliably investigate misunderstandings including a pre-opening effect. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can derive | lead-out the memory content of a detection log | history memory | storage means to the display means of a game machine. Furthermore, the detection information may be externally output so that the same detection information as the detection history storage means can be grasped by the hall computer. In addition, when the time of the time grasping means for grasping the current time provided in the gaming machine and the detection history are stored in association with each other, this operational effect is more prominent.

Means B-12. Type entry detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the type lottery area;
Vibration detecting means for detecting vibrations of the gaming machine;
Display means,
Any of the means B-1 to B-11, wherein when the type entry detecting means is detected, a display prompting attention not to vibrate the gaming machine is derived on the display means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

  According to the means B-12, it is possible to prevent the player from being too enthusiastic about the game and shaking the gaming machine, and the behavior of the game ball is changed by shaking the gaming machine. Such a situation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unfavorable situation for both the player who vibrates the gaming machine and the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed.

  C. Conventionally, for example, a pachinko machine is known as a kind of gaming machine. The pachinko machine is configured such that a game is played using a game ball, the game ball is provided with a movable game area, and the game ball launched by the launching unit is guided to the game area.

  Further, the pachinko machine is provided with specific ball entry means having a specific area where a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and the game ball enters the start ball entry means provided in the game area. When the specific ball entry means is in an open state that allows game balls to enter the specific area, and a game ball that has entered the specific area enters the special ball entry means in the same area, In some cases, a special gaming state advantageous to the player occurs (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

  By the way, as a gaming machine, there is a demand for new enhancement of interest by always adopting a new configuration.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine to which a new interest can be added.

Means C-1. A game area where game balls launched by the launching means are guided; and
Specific entry means having a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
The specific entry means is
In a state where a game ball is present in the specific area, another game ball can enter the specific area,
In the specific area,
A first type entry means capable of entering a game ball and a second type entry means;
First type entry detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the first type entry means;
A second type entry detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the second type entry means,
When a game ball is detected by the first type entry detection means, a first grant is made,
In a gaming machine in which a second grant that is more advantageous to the player than the first grant is performed when a game ball is detected by the second type entrance detection means,
The game ball moving in the specific area is configured to be able to enter, and the entered game ball always enters the first type entrance means (detected by the first type entrance detection means) Entry route,
The game ball moving in the specific area is configured to be able to enter, and the entered game ball always enters the second type entrance means (detected by the second type entrance detection means) Entry route,
Early detection means for detecting a game ball provided on at least one of the first entrance route and the second entrance route;
An early teaching means capable of teaching information related to detection by the early detection means.

  According to the means C-1, the game ball enters the first type entry means and the second type entry means when the game ball enters the first type entry means and the second type entry means, etc. It is possible to grasp at a stage prior to the ball and give a corresponding teaching. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect related to the entry of the game ball into the first type entry means and the second type entry means from the stage before entering the ball. Moreover, although it should have been decided to enter the first type entry means and the second type entry means, it is possible to avoid a sense of incongruity that there is no corresponding reaction (sound effect, display, etc.).

Means C-2. The entrance of the first entrance route is arranged on the upstream side of the moving path of the game ball in the specific area from the entrance of the second entrance route,
The first entrance route is configured such that the time required for the game ball to pass is longer than the second entrance route,
The gaming machine according to means C-1, wherein the early detection means includes at least first early detection means provided on the first entrance route.

  According to the means C-2, the game ball that has entered the specific area can enter the second incoming route when it has not entered the first incoming route. In other words, it is possible to expect excitement in the game by bringing the player into the second type entry means that is advantageous to the player later (so that the player who remains until the end has a good result). it can.

  In addition, the entrance of the second entry route that can be expected to give a second more advantageous for the player out of the first entry route and the second entry route is arranged on the downstream side. When, for example, two game balls enter a specific area in succession, even if the preceding game ball is guided to the second entrance route side, the subsequent game ball is the first game ball. When guided to the entrance route side, there is a concern that the following game balls will reach the first entrance route earlier.

  In this regard, according to the present means, the first entry route is configured such that the time required for the game ball to pass is longer than the second entry route (the distance is long, the angle is loose, etc.). . Therefore, for example, despite the fact that the preceding game ball is guided to the second entrance route, the subsequent game ball is guided to the first entrance route, and the preceding game ball enters the second type. Prior to entering the ball means, it is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which a subsequent game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the first grant occurs.

  Furthermore, when the time required for the game ball to pass through the first entrance route is increased, the game ball enters the first entrance route and then enters the first type entrance means to enter the first type entry. There is a concern that a relatively large time lag occurs before the detection by the sphere detection means. In this means, an early detection switch is provided in the first entry route, and it is possible to derive a reaction (sound effect, display, etc.) corresponding to the game ball entering the first entry route. Become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a sense of incongruity that the behavior of the game ball and the reaction of the gaming machine are deviated.

  Means C-3. The means described in means C-2, wherein when the detection by the first early detection means is performed, a preceding opening effect that suggests that the first provision is performed can be derived. Gaming machine.

  According to the means C-3, it is possible to derive a leading opening effect that suggests that the first grant is performed when the game ball is detected by the first early detection means installed in the first entrance route. Therefore, for example, when a game ball enters a specific area in a single shot and further enters the first entrance route, the first grant is determined at this point (as a player, (2) Although it is not a special game state, it may be a little discouraged), but it takes a relatively long time for the game ball to pass through the first entry route, and it is quite easy to get the first grant. Can be avoided. Therefore, it takes too much time (there is no reaction) until the first grant is made after the first grant is actually determined, and the game tempo deteriorates, leading to a decrease in interest. Etc. can be suppressed.

Means C-4. When the first grant and the second grant are performed, the first grant and the second grant are performed at the beginning of the first grant and the second grant. The opening production is taught to teach
When the first type of incoming ball detecting means and the second type of incoming ball detecting means are detected,
In the state where the preceding opening effect is not performed, the first provision of the first opening pattern in which the opening effect is performed for the first time, or the second provision is started,
In the state in which the preceding opening effect is performed, the opening effect is performed for a second time shorter than the first time, or the first provision of the second opening pattern in which the opening effect is omitted, or The gaming machine according to C-3, wherein the second grant is started.

  According to the means C-4, it is possible to prevent the opening effect from becoming too long by further performing the opening effect for the first time when the preceding opening effect is being performed. Accordingly, it is possible to more reliably avoid problems such as a deterioration in game tempo.

Means C-5. Entry detecting means for detecting all game balls that have entered the specific area (immediately after) on the upstream side of the first entry route and the second entry route;
It is configured to be able to count the number of game balls in the specific area, and a value is added based on detection by the entry detection means, and detection by the first early detection means and the second type entry detection means. The gaming machine according to means C-3 or C-4, further comprising first counting means for subtracting a value based on.

  According to the means C-5, for example, it is determined whether or not clogging has occurred in the specific area, or there is a game ball in addition to the game ball detected by the early detection means in the specific area. It can be determined whether or not. Therefore, it is possible to perform error processing due to ball clogging, improve the accuracy of the preceding opening effect, increase the amount of information of the preceding opening effect, and improve the game performance and performance. .

  Means C-6. When the early detection means is detected, based on the value of the first count means, downstream of the entry detection means, and upstream of the early detection means and the second type entry detection means It is determined whether or not a game ball is present in the area on the side, and if it is determined that it does not exist, the preceding opening effect is derived, and if it is determined that it exists (not the preceding opening effect) A game according to means C-5, characterized in that a promotion acceptance state teaching means is provided for teaching that the game is in a promotion acceptance state in which the possibility of a game ball entering the second entrance route is left. Machine.

  According to the means C-6, for example, when two game balls enter a specific area and a preceding game ball enters the first entrance route, the first grant has not yet been determined. As long as the subsequent game balls do not enter the first entrance route, the player can be surely recognized that there is a possibility that the second grant will remain. Therefore, the gameability can be understood more reliably, and in the situation as in the above example, the behavior of the subsequent game ball, the game ball continuously entering the specific area, etc. On the other hand, you can have a stronger interest.

  Means C-7. Means C comprising: a second counting means for adding a value based on the detection by the early detection means and subtracting a value based on the detection by the first type entry detecting means. A gaming machine according to any one of -3 to C-6.

  According to the means C-7, for example, it can be determined whether or not a ball clogging has occurred in the first incoming route. Therefore, it is possible to perform error processing due to ball clogging, improve the accuracy of the preceding opening effect, increase the amount of information of the preceding opening effect, and improve the game performance and performance. .

Means C-8. In the specific area,
A first guide passage that constitutes the first entry route for bringing a game ball to the first type entry means;
A second guide passage that constitutes the second entry route for bringing a game ball to the second type entry means;
Type distribution means for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific area to the first guide passage or the second guide passage is provided,
Covering means is provided so as to cover the front of the first guide passage (and reduce the visibility of the first guide passage),
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-7, wherein the visibility of the game ball changes before and after the game ball enters the first guide passage.

  According to the means C-8, the entrance of the first guide passage can be regarded as the entrance of the first type entry means. Therefore, basically, it is possible to make it easier to understand the premise of game play that the first grant is performed when entering the entrance of the first guide passage. In addition, by visually recognizing the first guide passage having a shape that delays the game ball, it is possible to prevent the designability from being deteriorated and the specific area from being complicated.

  Means C-9. In any one of means C-1 thru / or C-8, an entrance indicator which shows each entrance of the 1st entrance route and the 2nd entrance route is provided so that visibility is possible from the front. Gaming machine.

  According to the means C-9, the location of the entrance of the first entrance route and the second entrance route is clarified, and the game characteristics such as which of the entrance ball the first entrance route and the second entrance route enter. Can be made easier to understand. The entrance display unit may be configured to be capable of changing the form based on the detection information of the early detection means. In this case, it is possible to make it easier to understand whether or not the game ball has entered the corresponding entrance route.

Means C-10. In the specific area,
A first guide passage that constitutes the first entry route for bringing a game ball to the first type entry means;
A second guide passage that constitutes the second entry route for bringing a game ball to the second type entry means;
Type distribution means for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific area to the first guide passage or the second guide passage is provided,
The type distribution means can change state between a stationary state where the game balls that have reached the type distribution means are stopped in the type distribution means and a guide state in which the game balls are guided to the first guide path or the second guide path. A stopping means for changing the state between the stopping state and the guiding state every predetermined time or based on a predetermined trigger,
The type distribution means includes a stopping unit in which a game ball is stopped in the stopped state,
The stopping unit includes a first stopping unit that guides a game ball that has been stopped to the first guide passage when the type distribution unit is in the guidance state, and a game ball that has stopped. A second stop guided by two guide passages,
The first landing route is constituted by the first guiding passage and the first stopping portion, and the second landing route is constituted by the second guiding passage and the second stopping portion,
The early detection means includes
First standby detection means (first early detection means) for detecting a game ball stopped in the first stop,
A second standby detecting means for detecting a game ball stopped at the second stopping portion;
Any of means C-1 to C-9, wherein the early teaching means is configured to be able to teach information related to detection information by the first standby detection means and the second standby detection means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the means C-10, when the type distribution means is stopped, based on the detection information of the standby detection means, for example, if the type distribution means is currently in the guidance state, the game ball is guided to the second guide passage. It is possible to teach that (the second grant is made) or that the game ball is only guided to the first guide path (the first grant is made) at present. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance in the stationary state of the type distribution means and improve the interest.

  “When the game ball is stopped at the second stop, the type sorting unit is set to the guidance state regardless of whether the game ball is stopped at the first stop. As a result, the game ball stopped at the second stopping portion is guided to the second guide passage, and the second giving based on the detection of the second type entrance detecting means is performed. " Good.

  D. Conventionally, for example, a pachinko machine is known as a kind of gaming machine. The pachinko machine is configured such that a game is played using a game ball, the game ball is provided with a movable game area, and the game ball launched by the launching unit is guided to the game area.

  Further, the pachinko machine is provided with specific ball entry means having a specific area where a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and the game ball enters the start ball entry means provided in the game area. When the specific ball entry means is in an open state that allows game balls to enter the specific area, and a game ball that has entered the specific area enters the special ball entry means in the same area, In some cases, a special gaming state advantageous to the player occurs (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

  By the way, during the special game state or when the special game state right is obtained, even if the game ball enters the special ball entry means, a further special game state is given. Not. In other words, even if a relatively rare phenomenon such as a plurality of consecutive game balls entering the special ball entry means occurs, the right to be granted a special game state is only once, and the player has lost. I am concerned that I may have the impression of being a waste. As a result, there is a concern that a situation may arise in which the player is not happy to let go even though a favorable situation has been reached for the player, such as a case where a special game state is given.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and its purpose is a game capable of suppressing a decrease in interest due to a plurality of game balls entering a special ball entry means. Is to provide a machine.

Means D-0. A game area where game balls launched by the launching means are guided; and
Specific entry means having a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
The specific entry means is
In a state where a game ball is present in the specific area, another game ball can enter the specific area,
In the specific area,
A first type entry means capable of entering a game ball and a second type entry means;
First type entry detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the first type entry means;
A second type entry detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the second type entry means,
When a game ball is detected by the first type entry detection means, a first grant is made,
In a gaming machine in which a second grant that is more advantageous to the player than the first grant is performed when a game ball is detected by the second type entrance detection means,
In the specific area,
A first guide passage for bringing a game ball to the first type entry means;
A second guide passage for bringing the game ball to the second type entrance means;
Type distribution means for guiding game balls to the first guide passage or the second guide passage is provided,
The type distributing means distributes the game balls in the case where n number of game balls, which are more than m, at the same time are distributed simultaneously than the case where m game balls that have reached the type distributing means are simultaneously distributed. 2. A gaming machine configured to increase a ratio of guiding to a two-guide path.

Means D-1. A game area where game balls launched by the launching means are guided; and
Specific entry means having a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
The specific entry means is
In a state where a game ball is present in the specific area, another game ball can enter the specific area,
In the specific area,
A first type entry means capable of entering a game ball and a second type entry means;
First type entry detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the first type entry means;
A second type entry detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the second type entry means,
When a game ball is detected by the first type entry detection means, a first grant is made,
In a gaming machine in which a second grant that is more advantageous to the player than the first grant is performed when a game ball is detected by the second type entrance detection means,
In the specific area,
A first guide passage for bringing a game ball to the first type entry means;
A second guide passage for bringing the game ball to the second type entrance means;
Type distribution means for guiding game balls to the first guide passage or the second guide passage is provided,
The type distribution means can change state between a stationary state where the game balls that have reached the type distribution means are stopped in the type distribution means and a guide state in which the game balls are guided to the first guide path or the second guide path. A stopping means for changing the state between the stopping state and the guiding state every predetermined time or based on a predetermined trigger,
The type distribution means includes a stopping unit in which a game ball is stopped in the stopped state,
The stopping unit includes a first stopping unit that guides a game ball that has been stopped to the first guide passage when the type distribution unit is in the guidance state, and a game ball that has stopped. A second stop guided by two guide passages,
When the game ball is stopped at the second stop, the type distribution means is in the guidance state regardless of whether the game ball is stopped at the first stop, A gaming machine stopped at the second stopping portion is guided to the second guide passage, and the second grant based on the detection by the second type entrance detecting means is performed. .

  According to the means D-1, for example, when the game balls are stopped at both the first stopping part and the second stopping part, the type sorting means is brought into the guiding state and is guided to the second guiding passage. The second giving based on the detected game ball being detected by the second type entrance detection means is performed. For this reason, for example, although the game ball stopped at the second stop is guided to the second guide passage, the game ball stopped at the first stop is also guided to the first guide passage. Occurrence of an unpleasant phenomenon that the second application is not performed (becomes the first application) can be avoided. Therefore, the game ball can be stopped at the second stop portion anyway, and it is possible to ensure easy-to-understand gameability that the game ball only needs to be guided to the second guide passage. ) Can be made clear.

  Further, it is necessary to place a lot of game balls in a specific area of the specific ball entry means so that the game balls can be easily stopped at the second stop, and it is necessary to be afraid that the game balls are stopped at the first stop. Therefore, it is possible to associate a lot of game balls in a specific area with an advantage for the player. Accordingly, it is possible to eliminate the negative image of entering the game ball into the specific area of the specific ball entry means, and to play as much as possible into the specific area. You can enjoy it.

  In the state where the first grant is determined and the state where the second grant is determined, the first type entrance detection means and the second type entrance detection means It is good also as a structure where the said 1st provision corresponding and said 2nd provision are not performed even if detection of this is performed.

  In addition, the first stop portion and the second stop portion and the first guide passage and the second guide passage are not limited to the one-to-one correspondence, but are stopped by the type distribution means in the stop state. It suffices if the configuration is such that whether or not the game ball is guided to the second guide passage is determined by the arrangement or number of the game balls. For example, the stop portions A, B, and C may exist, the stop portions A and B may correspond to the first stop portion, and the stop portion C may correspond to the second stop portion. For example, the stop portion A, If B is present and the game ball is stopped only in one of the stop portions A and B, the game ball is guided to the first guide passage, and in that case, the game ball is stopped. When the stopping parts A and B correspond to the first stopping part and the game balls are stopped at both the stopping parts A and B, the game balls are guided to the second guide passage, The stop portions A and B may correspond to the second stop portion.

  Means D-2. The gaming machine according to means D-1, wherein the first stopping part and the second stopping part are formed in a concave shape capable of accommodating a game ball in the stopping state of the type distributing means.

  According to the means D-2, the game balls stopped at the first stopping part and the second stopping part can be more reliably held (positioned) at the first stopping part and the second stopping part. For this reason, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the game ball that is stopped is guided to the second guide passage in a state where the game ball is stopped by the type sorting means. In addition, it is possible to easily recognize that the game ball is guided to the second guide passage as compared to the configuration in which the game ball enters the second guide passage without flowing and stays. Furthermore, it is possible to thoroughly enjoy the state in which the game ball is determined to be guided to the second guide passage, and to see the game ball guided to the second guide passage more carefully. Therefore, it is possible to secure the gameability such that the game ball is desperately struck by the state in which the game ball is stopped by the type distribution means.

Means D-3. First standby detecting means for detecting a game ball stopped at the first stopping portion;
A second standby detection means for detecting a game ball stopped at the second stop,
A gaming machine according to means D-1 or D-2, further comprising standby teaching means capable of teaching information relating to detection information by the first standby detection means and the second standby detection means .

  According to the means D-3, for example, if the classification distribution means is currently in the guidance state based on the detection information of the standby detection means in the stationary state of the classification distribution means, the game ball is guided to the second guide passage. It is possible to teach that (the second grant is made) or that the game ball is only guided to the first guide path (the first grant is made) at present. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance in the stationary state of the type distribution means and improve the interest.

  In particular, when the stopped game ball is positioned as in the means D-2, when the game ball is stopped at the first stop portion or the second stop portion, the game ball is moved to the first stop portion. It is determined whether the guide path is guided to the guide path or the second guide path, and the standby detection means improves the accuracy of teaching based on the detection information. Therefore, the above-described effects can be achieved more reliably.

Means D-4. When a game ball is detected by the first type entry detection means, a first game state is given as the first grant,
When a game ball is detected by the second type entry detection means, a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state is given as the second grant,
In the state where the provision of the first gaming state is determined, the state where the provision of the second gaming state is determined, the first gaming state, and the second gaming state, the first type entry Even when the detection means and the detection of the second type entrance detection means are performed, the corresponding first grant and second grant are not performed,
The said 1st guide path is comprised so that the time required for a game ball to pass may become longer than the said 2nd guide path, The means in any one of the means D-1 thru | or D-3 characterized by the above-mentioned. Gaming machine.

  According to the means D-4, when the type distribution means is in the guidance state when the game balls are stopped at the first stop and the second stop, the game balls stopped at the first stop Prior to being detected by the first type entry detecting means, the game ball stopped at the second stopping portion is detected by the second type entry detecting means. For this reason, the effect of the means D-1 such as allowing the player to fully enjoy the gameability of entering as many game balls as possible into the specific area is more reliably achieved.

  By adopting this configuration, when game balls are stopped at both the first stop and the second stop, the game balls stopped at the first stop enter the first guide passage. Even if it is allowed to do so, since the second grant can be performed, for example, when the game ball is stopped at both the first stop portion and the second stop portion, it was stopped at the first stop portion. There is no need to separately provide a configuration for preventing the game ball from entering the first guide passage.

  Means D-5. The second stop is disposed downstream of the first stop, and the game ball is allowed to reach the second stop by setting the game ball in the first stop. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-4, characterized in that it can be stopped.

  According to the means D-5, by allowing a plurality of game balls to reach the type distribution means, it is possible to enjoy the state of stepping up so as to be advantageous to the player. In addition, it is possible to capture a good impression that the game ball is stopped at the first stop.

Means D-6. The type distribution unit includes a distribution unit that guides the game ball stopped by the stop unit to the first guide path or the second guide path when the type distribution unit is in the guide state.
If the number of game balls stopped by the stopping means is m, all the stopped game balls are guided to the first guide passage by the distribution unit,
When the number of game balls stopped by the stopping means is n more than the m, at least one of the stopped game balls is guided to the second guide passage by the distribution unit. A gaming machine according to means D-1 or D-2, characterized in that

  According to the means D-6, whether or not a game ball guided to the second guide passage appears is determined by the number of game balls stopped by the type distribution means in the stopped state. That is, the player plays a game with the goal of stopping n game balls in the type distribution means. Therefore, the function and effect of the means D-1 can be more reliably achieved, such as allowing the player to fully enjoy the gameability of entering as many game balls as possible into the specific area. Further, by allowing a plurality of game balls to reach the type distribution means, it is possible to enjoy the state of stepping up so as to be advantageous to the player.

  In this means, when the type distribution means is in the guidance state and at least one of the stopped game balls is guided to the second guide passage, those game balls are stopped. If the stopping part corresponds to the second stopping part (and consequently), the type sorting means is in the guidance state, and all the stopped game balls are guided to the first guide passage. The stopping part in which these game balls are stopped corresponds to (as a result) the first stopping part.

Means D-7. The stopping part is formed in a concave shape capable of storing game balls one by one in the stopping state of the type distributing means.
Corresponding to each stopping part, a standby detection means for detecting a game ball stopped in the stopping part is provided,
The game according to means D-6, characterized in that teaching means capable of teaching information relating to the number of game balls stopped in the type distribution means is provided based on detection information of the standby detection means. Machine.

  According to the means D-7, it is possible to reliably grasp the number of game balls stopped by the standby detection means. And, the number of game balls that are stopped can be reduced to n, or the number of game balls that are stopped can still be increased to n (some), and the performance can be improved. Etc. can be achieved.

Means D-8. A arrival detecting means for detecting a game ball that enters the specific area and always reaches the type distributing means,
The stopping means is in a driving state when the arrival detecting means is detected,
Any one of means D-1 to D-7, wherein, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the type distribution means is brought into a drive stop state at a reference position where the stop state is brought about. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means D-8, as the stopping means continues to operate and the type distributing means changes between the stopped state and the guide state, the game balls that have reached the type distributing means are not stopped and the type distributing means is stopped. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a case of passing through is generated. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably enjoy the real pleasure of enjoying the game ball stoppage to the type distribution means. Further, it is possible to give a special feeling when the stopping means is driven while saving energy.

  Note that there are valid state and invalid state where the detection of the first type of incoming ball detecting means and the second type of incoming ball detecting means is valid, and the first type of incoming ball detecting means and the second type of incoming light are detected. When the detection by the ball detection means is performed, the state is switched to the invalid state, the first grant or the second grant is performed, and the valid state is entered when there is no game ball in the specific area. It may be switched.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

  a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, A ball ball game machine including a game area where a game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general prize opening, variable prize winning device, operation opening, etc.) arranged in the game area.

  b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a bullet ball gaming machine having a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, The game balls are guided and extended along a substantially vertical direction (for example, the game area is constituted by a game board surface), and each ball entry means (general winning mouth, And a ball game machine configured to be able to visually recognize the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area.

  c. The gaming machine in each of the above means or each of the above ball game machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 33a, 33b ... Start winning device, 33c ... Opening / closing member, 37 ... Central winning unit, 42 ... Decoration symbol display device, 43 ... Special display device, 224a, 224b ... Start winning switch, 261 ... Main control device , 262 ... Sub-control device, 401 ... Specific area, 403 ... Ball opening, 404 ... Blade member, 410 ... Rotating body unit, 414 ... Rotating body, 416 ... Pocket part, 416a ... Special pocket part, 427 ... Safe passage 428 ... Out passage, 437 ... Entering count switch, 461 ... Special entrance detection switch, 462 ... Non-special entrance detection switch.

Claims (1)

A game area where game balls launched by the launching means are guided; and
Specific entry means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area,
A first entry means capable of entering a game ball entered into the specific entry means, and a second entry means;
First entry detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the first entry means;
A second incoming detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second incoming means;
When a game ball is detected by the first incoming ball detecting means, a first grant is performed,
When a game ball is detected by the second ball detection means, a second grant that is more advantageous for the player than the first grant is performed,
A first determination time until a game ball that has entered the specific entry means is detected by the first entry detection means,
The game ball that has entered the specific entry means is configured to be longer than a second determination time until the second entry detection means detects the game ball,
A pre-detection means for detecting a game ball that enters the specific entry means and enters the first entry means before entering the first entry means;
Based on the detection of the previous detection means, it is configured to be able to derive a teaching effect for teaching that the second grant is performed when a game ball is detected by the second incoming detection means,
When the previous detection means is detected during the teaching effect, the teaching effect is continuously performed,
A gaming machine, wherein when the second entrance detection means is detected during the teaching effect, an effect corresponding to the second grant is performed following the teaching effect.

Images